JP7372881B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

In conventional gaming machines, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (entering the starting area of the game ball), a display means displays a specific display (a pending display or an active display) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. There is a system that can execute a pre-read notice indicating that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state even before the start of the variable display, for the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

Furthermore, some conventional game machines are capable of executing a pre-read notice (specific light emission effect) by causing a light emitting means provided in the game machine to emit light (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2016-105941A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing at which the display of the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. It is possible that

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to easily recognize a specific display that is a target of a specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
A display means having a display area capable of displaying an image, capable of displaying a display image of game-related information regarding the progress of the game in the display area, and capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
a storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image for displaying each image arranged in the plurality of display layers in the display area;
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a specific display effect that displays the specific display and a specific light emitting effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light can be executed, and a specific display effect that displays the specific image in the display area can be performed. and an executable production execution means,
The image processing means is capable of generating the specific image in a specific display layer,
The display image of the game-related information is generated on a special display layer that is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer,
The effect executing means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a manner according to the specific light emitting effect before the display of the specific display is completed, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition,
The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect indicating that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is not being executed. The specific light emitting effect can be executed by
Further comprising a sound output means capable of outputting a variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display, a suggestive performance compatible sound corresponding to the suggestive performance, and a specific light emitting performance compatible sound corresponding to the specific light emitting performance,
The sound output means is
When the specific light emitting effect is executed when the variable display compatible sound is output, the specific light emitting effect compatible sound can be output with priority over the variable display compatible sound that is being output,
When the specific light emitting effect is executed when the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the specific light emitting effect corresponding sound can be outputted with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output,
Before the light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and at a predetermined ending timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission,
If the light emission of the light emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the light emitting means of the light emitting means may emit light at a specific end timing subsequent to the predetermined end timing. Perform special termination control to terminate the
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
It has a display area that can display images, and the display area contains game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and the small display area that is smaller than the decorative symbols). A display means (for example, a display means that can display a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a symbol) and a specific display (for example, a pending display and an active display) corresponding to a variable display (for example, , an image display device 5),
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 14-5) etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, and a effect execution means that is capable of executing an effect that displays the specific image in the display area (for example, a A production control CPU 120) that executes the variable display processing shown in 14-17;
Equipped with
The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (the part where image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23). A displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), and Figures 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed. (a part that lights up a flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize), executes a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the characteristic part 006SG) that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display. It is possible and
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emission effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display. In addition, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in a specific effect. A specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data than when image data of a specific image is exclusively stored. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing when a specific performance is executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, an image displayed on an image display device (display means) is broken at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-141396. There was something that could perform a scattering effect (specific effect). However, in such gaming machines, the effect is simply that the image breaks and scatters, so it is possible to improve the effect by performing the effect while other images are being displayed on the image display device. However, in this case, dedicated image data must be created for each image displayed on the image display device to execute the effect, and the amount of data to be stored in the storage means would be limited. There is a problem that the size may become excessively large, and in view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific performance.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can perform variable display,
It has a display area that can display images, and the display area contains game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and the small display area that is smaller than the decorative symbols). a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J);
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 14-5) etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
an effect execution means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 14-17);
Equipped with
The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (the part where image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23). A displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface Image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a displacement specific image in which at least a portion of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Therefore, compared to the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is exclusively stored, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image during execution of the specific performance, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from being reduced.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, and (C) is the configuration of the active display buffer. It is a figure which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of the pending display notice effect as a pre-read notice. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of a specific display display start effect execution process. It is a diagram showing a performance mode of a specific display display start performance A. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of specific display display start performance B. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing presentation modes of a flash effect at the time of winning in the first period and a flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. (A) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp turned off. be. A front view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state where the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness (C2) and a pachinko game machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp when the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness. FIG. When a starting winning that is eligible for the winning flash effect occurs, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting gate lamp, and the timing of displaying the effect image and silhouette image. FIG. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. In the case of a starting winning that is subject to the winning flash effect in the modified example, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting gate lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of . It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting port lamp, the display of the effect image and the silhouette image, and the operation of the movable body in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of displaying a flash lamp and a silhouette image at the time of winning in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. They are a timing chart showing the timing of the operation of the winning flash lamp and the movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing the determination ratio of the timing at which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp changes. It is a figure which shows the display mode of pending display and active display in a modified example, the content suggested by each display mode, and the selection ratio at the time of deciding to execute a flash effect at the time of winning. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in an effect control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of generation of a displacement image when a displacement image is applied to a displacement target image. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a displacement image to a displacement target image. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display image processing processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a generated image and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of development suggestion production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in the development suggestion performance. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach suggestion production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach suggestion production in a modification. It is an explanatory view of an image generated in a reach suggestion performance in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the revival performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the revival performance in a modification. It is an explanatory view of an image generated in a revival performance in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the display color of a crack effect image in a revival effect in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the pre-read preview performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a prefetch preview effect in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-read preview performance in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-read preview performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a promotion effect in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an image generated in a modification and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop suggestion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop suggestion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop notification performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of displaying a stereoscopic image in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the preview performance during a variable display, and development suggestion performance in a modification. It is an explanatory view when the present invention is applied to a slot machine in a modified example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) , a specific display display start effect) and a specific light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize);
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), and Figures 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emission effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0).
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect section (for example, FIG. 10-15, FIG. 10-30(D) to FIG. 10-32(H), FIG. 10-49(B)) where the appearance effect of the specific display is executed. ~As shown in Figure 10-50 (D), when the performance control CPU 120 executes the specific display display start performance execution process, an appearance animation in which the pending display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed. part), and a periodic effect part (for example, FIG. 10-15, FIG. 10-30 (D) to As shown in FIG. 10-32 (H), FIG. 10-49 (B) to FIG. 10-50 (D), the performance control CPU 120 executes the specific display rotation display performance execution process, so that the suspended display and active (the part where the display is displayed as a rotating animation),
The timing when the display of the specific display is completed is the start timing of the periodic effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, from the timing when the appearance animation of the pending display or active display is completed, (The part where the rotation animation of these pending and active displays starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or Form 2,
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), When executing display start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp are activated as the winning flash effect from a timing before the display start of the pending display or active display. (The part where the body lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect),
The display means displays the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display display start effect A that only performs an appearance animation in which a pending display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top, and a first display mode in which the character A is It can be displayed in specific display display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the pending display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top after acting on the pending memory display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, specific display display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49(A) to 10-50(D) , the part where the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can surely see the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. Recognizable.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
The effect executing means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low brightness state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-29(A), 10-29(B), FIG. 10-49(A), and FIG. 10-49(B), when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F , the part that turns off the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
Note that the "low brightness state" in the present invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low brightness but also a state in which no light is emitted.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
The effect execution means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the display means to a low visibility state (for example, as shown in Modification Example 135SG-11, when executing a flash effect at the time of winning, the image (The part that starts the flash effect at the time of winning after reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
Note that the "low visibility state" in the present invention refers to a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is reduced by a method other than reducing the brightness of the display means. It also includes a degraded state.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a preview effect) that suggests that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state while executing the variable display, and is capable of executing a suggestive effect that indicates that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), and 10-49(A) to 10-68( As shown in (n), the part where the winning flash effect can be executed depending on whether the preview effect is being executed or not),
A variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display (the variable display compatible sound shown in FIG. 10-28), a suggestive performance compatible sound corresponding to the suggestive performance (the preview performance compatible sound shown in FIG. 10-29(A)), Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (sound corresponding to the winning flash effect shown in FIG. 10-29(B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect;
The sound output means is
When the specific light emitting effect is executed while the variable display compatible sound is being output, the specific light emitting effect compatible sound can be output with priority over the variable display compatible sound that is being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-29 (B), when executing the winning flash effect while the variable display is being executed, the variable display compatible sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in Figure 10-29(B), when executing the winning flash effect while the preview effect is being executed, the sound corresponding to the preview effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs the sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect allows the player to execute the specific light emission effect. It becomes easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound,
In the specific light emission performance, the effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect from the sound output means before either the display of the specific display is completed or the light emission means emits light (for example, FIG. 10-28 , As shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), and Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), execution of the winning flash effect is determined in response to the starting winning. (If this is the case, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will start from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will start, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition is met by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound,
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means includes:
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a part capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a flash effect when winning a prize from speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-12, execution of a winning flash effect in response to a winning start) If it is determined, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can quickly recognize that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the light emitted from the light emitting means, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
The specific light emitting effect is such that during the first period, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect, and during the second period, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is more emphasized than the predetermined manner. This is a performance that emits light in a specific manner with a low degree of intensity (for example, as shown in Figure 10-28, during the execution period of the first-term winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at brightness C1, During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can be made aware of the start of a specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues to emit light in a predetermined manner during the second period as well. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the light emitting and interfering with other performances.
Note that the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is being executed (for example, in FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the execution period of the late winning flash effect includes the period during which the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, and the execution period of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect. period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine described in Form 10 or Form 11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started, the first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner). When a certain variable display starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C1 and cycle T1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect compatible image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect compatible image from the first display mode during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and when the winning period in the second period is During the execution period of the flash effect, the part that displays the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first period, the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be displayed on the display means in the first display mode to make the player recognize the start of the specific light emission effect, and in the second period, the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be displayed in the first display mode. By displaying the image compatible with the specific light emitting effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image compatible with the specific light emitting effect in the first display mode, which obstructs other displays and reduces the interest in the game. It is possible to suppress the decline.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to Form 13,
The display means displays the specific light emission compatible image in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, (a portion for displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 14,
comprising a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect corresponding to the specific light emission effect;
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the second period, or outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect at a higher intensity than the first output mode. Output in the second output mode with a lower level (for example, as shown in Figure 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1) and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from speakers 8l and 8R at a volume of V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific light emission effect has started. During execution, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, so that it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to other effects being obstructed by the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect. .

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to Form 15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13). (a part that outputs a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (For example, in the modified example 135SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10-69, the production control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command from the speakers 8L and 8R during the execution of the flash production at the time of late winning. The pattern is confirmed by stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize, turning off the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize, hiding the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, clearing the process timer for the flash effect when winning a prize in the later period, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect as the flash effect during the later period, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S will not be executed, and the first variable display start command will be received. Based on this, by reselecting the process table for the flash effect at the time of winning the second term and resetting and starting the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, the flash effect at the time of winning the second term (flash at the time of winning the term (The part that starts the output of the sound corresponding to the performance, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The first light emitting means is configured to respond to the specific light emitting effect during a temporary stop when a re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-69 and FIG. 10-70(A) to FIG. 10-89(n) as modified example 135SG-1, the flash effect is the subject of winning.) During the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is executed before the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the variable display has ended even though it is temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 18,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the second period (for example, as modified example 135SG-1, FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (A ) ~ As shown in FIG. 10-89(n), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2 even during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect),
Even during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission continues in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as modification 135SG-1) As shown in Figures 10-69 and 10-70 (A) to Figure 10-89 (n), during the temporary suspension period of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are subject to the winning flash effect, the winning flash part of the lamp 135SG009F that continues to blink at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (For example, as shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), during the execution of the late winning flash effect, the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started. During the symbol confirmation period of the previous variable display, the part where the flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink when winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by continuing to emit light during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, the player's expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is targeted by the specific light emitting effect. The variable display can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to Form 20,
The display means is capable of variably displaying first performance identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and variable display of second performance identification information (for example, a small pattern) whose visibility is lower than that of the first performance identification information. A gaming machine,
During the result display period, the second production identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33 (J), during the symbol confirmation period, small symbols are displayed variably. (the part displayed when the is stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the light emission continues during the result display period, the second performance identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so the player can be made aware that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 21,
The display means can display a specific light emission performance corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission performance in the second period so as not to overlap with the display of the second performance identification information (for example, FIG. 10-33 (J) As shown in FIG. 3, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect being displayed overlappingly with the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state,
The first light emitting means emits light in a manner according to the specific light emitting effect until the specific effect is started when the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. When the performance starts, it starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figure 10-90 as modification 135SG-2, the super reach that is the target of the flash performance at the time of winning is variable). In the display, before the start of the super reach reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and from the start timing of the super reach reach effect, the winning time flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness of C2. part to light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance instead of in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance, so that the game interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to Form 23,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIG. 10-96(K) to FIG. 10-98(O)). , as shown in FIGS. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout),
The first light emitting means enters a low brightness state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and after entering the low brightness state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 10-90, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of Super Reach's reach effect.) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying switching to the specific performance start image, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emitting mode. Since this can be prevented, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine described in Form 23 or Form 24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means includes, as the specific performance, a motion performance that causes the movable body to move at the start of the specific performance (for example, a movable body motion performance shown in FIG. 10-90), and suggests execution of the motion performance. It is possible to perform a motion suggestion performance (for example, a movable body motion suggestion performance shown in FIG. 10-90),
The first light emitting means enters a low brightness state when executing the action suggesting effect, and after entering the low brightness state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the action effect which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , as shown in Figure 10-90, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect during the whiteout period, and the winning flash is turned off from the start timing of the super reach reach effect thereafter. The part that lights up the lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emitting mode. As a result, you can increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special performance different from the specific light emission performance is executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-108(A) as modification 135SG-3). (As shown in FIG. 1), when performing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect.
When the specific light emitting effect is started during the execution of the special effect, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect with priority over a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in Figure 10-108(B), when performing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp is set in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect. 135SG009F continues to light up (flashing)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of Form 27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 26,
The first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, when it ends at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-119(A) and 10-119(B) as modification example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F responds to the winning flash effect. The timing to end the light emission mode is the timing to start the movable body movement performance during the variable display that is the target of the flash performance when winning a prize, and the timing to start the reach performance of super reach),
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner according to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner according to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing. The rate at which the winning state is controlled to be advantageous differs depending on the end of the game. The expectation level of jackpot in the case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement performance according to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement performance, and when the light emission mode is changed according to the said reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance. (different parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 28 is the gaming machine according to Form 27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the time of the end is different depending on when the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing and when it ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 as modification example 135SG-4, during the execution period of the movable body movement effect, depending on the timing of ending the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, In some cases, it may be during the execution period of Super Reach's reach effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of Form 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 28,
The performance execution means executes a first performance (for example, a movable body movement performance shown in FIG. 10-119 as a modification example 135SG-4) and a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a modification example 135SG-4) during variable display. -4, it is possible to execute the super reach reach effect shown in Figure 10-119),
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the first effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(A) as modification example 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body movement performance. (The part that changes the lighting mode according to the motion effect),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be changed to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(B) as modification example 135SG-4, the part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emission mode according to the reach effect),
When changing from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode of light emission corresponding to the first effect, and when changing from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode of light emission corresponding to the second effect. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed depending on the winning flash performance). The expectation level of jackpot is different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set from the start timing of the movable body movement performance to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement performance, and the case where the light emission mode is set from the start timing of the reach performance to the light emission mode according to the reach performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means controls an action performance that causes the movable body to move (for example, a movable body motion performance), a motion suggestion performance that suggests execution of the motion performance (for example, a movable body motion suggestion performance), and an advantageous state. It is possible to carry out a specific performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach) that suggests that the
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the action suggestion effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission can change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect (for example, a modified example). As shown in 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting performance from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting performance. parts to be changed),
With the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a modified example As shown in 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the super reach effect. ),
The rate at which the light is controlled to an advantageous state is different when changing from the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect and when changing to the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, , as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting performance according to the movable body motion suggesting performance. (The part where the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the lighting mode and the lighting mode depending on the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 30,
The display modes of the specific display include a normal mode (for example, display pattern α), a special mode (for example, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIG. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5), and a special mode (for example, display pattern β and display pattern γ).
The special aspect includes a first special aspect (for example, display pattern γ) and a second special aspect (for example, display pattern β) different from the first special aspect,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, in FIG. 10-17 As shown in the figure, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the part that is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ or The part where the pending display or active display displayed in display pattern ε can be changed to the pending display or active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the percentage of execution of the specific light emitting effect is higher than when it is displayed in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10 as Modification 135SG-5). As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, it is easier to win a prize than when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. (parts where flash effects are executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a specific display is displayed in a special mode, by executing a specific light emitting effect at a high rate, it is determined whether the special mode changes to the first special mode or the second special mode. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 32 is the gaming machine according to Form 31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, flashing white as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modification example 135SG-5),
The special aspect is an aspect of a special color different from the specific color (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, blue or red),
The normal mode is a mode of a color other than the specific color and the special color (for example, white),
The specific display of the specific color changes to the special color at a higher rate when the specific light emitting effect is being executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not being executed (for example, Modified Example 135SG-5 As shown in , when a pending display or an active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. parts with different rates of change to pattern β and display pattern γ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of specific display can be easily understood by the difference in color, and when a specific display of a specific color is displayed, the player pays attention to whether or not a specific light emitting effect is being executed. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 33 is the gaming machine according to Form 31 or Form 32,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a change suggestion effect that suggests that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. (For example, a part where the first effect and second effect shown in Modification Example 135SG-5 can be executed),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, in Modified Example 135SG-5). As shown in , the second effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is a performance),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, in Modification 135SG-5). As shown, when the second effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode by executing the specific light emission effect. It is possible to increase expectations for the implementation in two ways.

The gaming machine of Form 34 is the gaming machine according to Form 33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ shown in FIG. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5). ), and a second special mode in which the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and changes to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, as modified example 135SG-5 in FIG. 10-120 The display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the percentage of execution of the specific light emitting effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode) When the display pattern ε is displayed, the percentage of flash effects executed at the time of winning is higher than when the specific display is displayed using the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and when the second special mode has a high rate of change to the special mode. Since the specific light emitting effect is executed at a high rate in the second special mode, the execution of the specific light emitting effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of Form 35 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light emission display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to a variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in modification example 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when winning a prize can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be easily recognized by the player, and the specific display can be hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 36 is the gaming machine according to Form 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the display means can display a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of different sizes on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning). (portion where silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The manner of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-129 (L) and FIG. 10-130 (N) as modification example 135SG-7) , a portion where the overlapping aspect of the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to specific light emitting effects are displayed, and the manner of overlapping with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to specific light emitting effects, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 37 is the gaming machine according to Form 35 or Form 36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (for example, a pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed yet, and a second variable display (for example, an active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap with the first specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap with the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, Before the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect is started, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display that is the object of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the first holding memory display area 135SG005D. , while the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide even more surprises to the players and improve their enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 38 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again.
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display regarding the re-variable display performance, and also displays a specific light-emitting performance corresponding display corresponding to the specific light-emission performance during the specific light-emitting performance, overlapping with the re-variable related display. (For example, if a pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the winning flash effect, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, it will stop in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. Special design (see Figure 10-40, etc.) where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed overlappingly as a flash effect when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so it is possible to provide surprise to the player and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 35 to 38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 10-28, FIG. 10-42(a) to FIG. 10-47( As shown in l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 40 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 39,
The performance execution means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends at a predetermined time. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in Figure 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be activated before the start of the ready-to-win effect). flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the start timing of the reach effect),
If the light emission of the first light emitting means in the manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not ended at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc.) If this is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (timing when the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a timing later than the start timing of the reach effect, a second-term winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is performed again. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to a specific light emission effect is not normally completed.

The gaming machine of Form 41 is the gaming machine according to Form 40,
Equipped with a game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is capable of transmitting variable display end information that notifies the end of the variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(A) , a part where the CPU 103 can send a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stop of the variable display of decorative symbols),
The performance execution means performs the specific end control based on receiving the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the performance control CPU 120 The part that ends the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half based on receiving the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort when ending light emission in a manner that corresponds to a specific light emission performance.

The gaming machine of Form 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing. (portion where flash lamp 135SG009F can stop flashing),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the performance control CPU 120 to trigger the winning flash due to the generation of static electricity, etc. If it is not possible to stop the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be started again at the end timing of the variable display, which is a timing later than the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the reach effect. (The part that ends the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, it is possible to end the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of Form 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 42,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, a super reach performance) that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that does not decide to execute the flash effect at the time of winning if a starting winning occurs in the mouth),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to a specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 43,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the specific light emitting effect, and the remaining period of the variable display is the same as or shorter than the predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is satisfied for a period longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-8, when the first starting port is When a starting winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is less than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emitting effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the specific light emitting effect being executed when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of Form 45 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 44,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests control to an advantageous state even in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figure 10-9, even in a variable display where the variable display result is a failure) (The part where you can perform the reach effect of Super Reach),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, a modified As shown in Example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs at the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. If it is less than the execution period, the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific effect and the specific light emission effect from becoming less interesting due to the specific effect and the specific light emission effect being executed overlappingly.

The gaming machine of Form 46 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 45,
A specific area where the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through (for example, the winning ball device 6A forming the first starting winning opening);
a specific light emitting means (for example, a starting port lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific area and capable of emitting light in different light emission modes;
Equipped with
The display means can display the specific display in any one of a plurality of display modes that differ in the rate at which the specific display is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, a pending display or an active parts that can be displayed in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, When the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starting port lamp 135SG009S starts regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. (a portion that emits light in a color according to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of a winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 47 is the gaming machine described in Form 46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-9, (a part where the number of light emitting modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission production is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash display);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission variations of the specific light emitting means are increased, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 48 is the gaming machine according to Form 46 or Form 47,
The light emitting area of the first light emitting means is larger than the light emitting area of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect is , a portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a lighting effect of the starting port lamp),
The period during which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition of No. 1 is such that the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (If it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will emit light after the starting winning occurs.) While the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win display on the variable display that is the target of the start-up winning flash display, the starting exit lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win display that is the target of the start winning flash display, while the start exit lamp 135SG009S displays the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice display (flash display when winning) after the start winning occurs. (the part that emits light until the end of the variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to excessively long execution of light emission by the first light emitting means in accordance with the specific light emitting effect, and to prevent the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means from becoming more advantageous. Players' expectations can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of Form 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 46 to 48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the section where the starting port lamp 135SG009S can flash),
The flashing cycle of the first light emitting means is different from the flashing cycle of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the flashing cycle of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is set as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect). Parts that differ from the blinking cycle of lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking cycles are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (the jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 135SG)
Next, the feature section 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature section 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A A starting port lamp 135SG009S for causing the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) to emit light is provided near the starting port.

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for causing the stick controller 31A to emit light is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for causing the push button 31B to emit light is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135Sg009Y, together with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d, constitute the game effect lamp 9 in the main feature section 135SG.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for performance control via the lamp control board 14. It can be turned on (flashing) under control from the CPU 120.

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature section 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first reservation memory display area 135SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of circular reservation displays, and a second reservation memory number of special symbols can be displayed by a circular reservation display. The second display area 135SG005Sa includes a second reserved storage display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of characters, and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display telops indicating the game status, the performance being executed, etc.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 has a fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. Moreover, the small pattern 135SG005M is a pattern that is not hidden during variable display and is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the main characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. It is arranged at the left end of the 1 display area 135SG005F in a smaller size than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the main feature section 135SG for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and the active display may be collectively referred to as a specific display.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 135SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 10-4 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, the jackpot type (probable variable or non-probable variable), and a small hit as the winning determination result. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 10-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this feature section 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 135SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table being referenced.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 135SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 135SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more determination values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 135SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 135SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 135SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 135SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 135SG using FIG. 10-7(B), in this feature section 135SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). . In addition, in the jackpot game state of "probable variable jackpot C" and "non-probable variable jackpot", rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

Although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in the feature section 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot are continuously performed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without going through the normal state. , resulting in a so-called consecutive housing situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 135SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 10-7 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a special game or not, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a definite jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 10-8 shows a variation pattern in the main feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the normal reach variation pattern includes a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect described below is not executed, and a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect described below is executed once, and a common normal reach variation pattern. is now executed. Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern includes a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice, which will be described later, and a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect, which will be described later, is executed three times. The performance is now executed. In other words, although this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which only one type of reach performance is provided as a normal reach reach performance and a super reach reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as normal reach effects and super reach effects.

Incidentally, the variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern is executed in the feature section 135SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and variable-displayed again during a variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during a variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, regarding the super reach variation patterns in this feature section 135SG, there are a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during a variable display, and a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during a variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed 3 times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic section 135SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In other words, regarding the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the feature section 135SG, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous performance is executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level becomes.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this characteristic section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (super It is determined from the variable pattern of reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 times jackpot). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1 Determined from -2 (Normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 time jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Normal reach pseudo continuous performance 2 time jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Normal reach pseudo continuous performance 3 time jackpot variation pattern) .

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, Determine PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 20%. 4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, when paying attention to the number of times pseudo-continuous effects are executed, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot, it is easier to execute many pseudo-continuous effects during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. There is. Therefore, this feature section 135SG allows the player to pay attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for miss, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time variation variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (time-saving shortening variation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern with 1 miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times) It is determined from PA2-4 (variation pattern of failure of 3 times of super reach pseudo consecutive performance).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 135SG is "off", the special figure is displayed based on the fact that the number of pending memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or that the time is shortened. The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 135SG includes a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 135SG153, a game control counter setting section 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 135SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 135SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 135SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern holding storage section 135SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game balls with the pending numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 135SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 135SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, numerical data indicating random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, random numbers MR2 to MR4, is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 135SG191, a production control timer setting section 135SG192, a production control counter setting section 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 135SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 135SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 135SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting section 135SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 135SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 135SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 135SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) is provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) is provided. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are an area for storing these starting opening winning designation commands and a storage area for storing the symbol designating commands. Indicates the storage area, the area to store the variable category designation command, the area to store the pending storage number notification command, the area to store the pending display flag, and whether or not it is subject to the winning flash effect described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the winning flash performance target flag and the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory in association with the number of pending memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition has been met is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. will be deleted. Then, the storage contents of storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted one by one to the storage areas higher up.

As described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the active display buffer 135SG194B stores the content of the pending memory (for which the start condition is satisfied). Since the data) is copied, as shown in FIG. 10-11(C), a storage area similar to the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A is provided. In other words, there is an area for storing the starting opening winning designation command, an area for storing the symbol designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending storage number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag. , and an area for storing a winning flash effect flag indicating whether or not the winning flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs when the variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a holding The storage number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without passing through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of starting winning. In addition, the suspension display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing a prefetch notice setting process (S161) to be described later.

The stored contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Note that the pending display flag is a flag indicating a display mode of an active display corresponding to a pending display or a variable display in progress. Although the details will be described later, in this feature section 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting prize winning determination process of the main feature section 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 135 SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 135SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 135SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 135SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 135 SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 135SGS105 (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 135SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 135SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage section according to the starting opening buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 135SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 135SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 135SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 135SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for (step 135 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and then the process of step 135SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6) is performed to treat the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "jackpot". A determination is made as to whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 135SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 135SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 135SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 135SGS125; Y), the variable display result is determined to be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 135SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 135SGS128). 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), determine the variation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, this feature section 135SG also stores fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C is prepared in advance to be used when the number of pending memories is 4, but as shown in FIG. 10-9, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C. , In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and In the fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take, and the fluctuation pattern determination table for outliers is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for failure in step 135SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine when a starting prize is won.

In addition, if it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 135 SGS134). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Proceed to 135SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 135SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the data, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 135 SGS138). In this feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 135SGS138 to the performance control board 12 (step 135SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 135 SGS 221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening winning designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 135 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 135SGS224 (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), then in step 135SGS228, the received command is the first pending storage number notification command. (135SGS228; Y), and in step 135SGS230, if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is transferred to the starting prize receiving command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11. It is stored at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and if there is pending memory or variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting prize winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 135SGS230 (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this feature section 135SG, if the received command is any one of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and pending storage number notification command, the received command is used at the starting winning time. Although an example is given in which the received command is sequentially stored from the beginning of the free space of the received command buffer 135SG194A, the present invention is not limited to this. If the received command is the 1st starting slot winning designation command, the command is used to notify the number of pending storage numbers. If a timer is set to wait for the reception of the number of pending memories, and if no pending memory number notification command is received before the timer times out, the pending memory of the entry that has not received the number of pending memory notification commands will be processed as described below. It may be set to be excluded from the reading preview performance.

Next, the production control process processing in the feature section 135SG will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then displays the active display area 135SG005A, the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, and the second pending display area 135SG005A. A specific display start performance execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed to execute a specific display display start performance as a display start animation of the pending display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. In addition, after the specific display display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 performs a winning flash performance execution process (step 135SGS163) to execute a winning flash performance after the specific display display start performance described above is completed. To execute a specific display rotation display effect (see Figures 10-19 (B-1) to Figure 10-19 (B-4)) as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the pending display or active display. In the specific display rotating display effect execution process (step 135SGS164), when it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect as a pre-read notice in this feature section 135SG, a variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect is executed. A starting exit lamp light emitting performance execution process (step 135SG165) for executing a starting exit lamp light emitting performance that causes the starting exit lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the hold display/active display based on the hold memory until the end of the process (step 135SG165) and executes any one of steps S170 to S177.

Note that the specific display rotating display effect execution processing in this feature section 135SG includes processing for shifting each pending display to the next display position and displaying it as a rotating animation based on the start of the variable display, and processing for displaying the pending display as an active display. It also includes processing for shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotating animation.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of FIG. 10-15 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) to determine whether there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set. Determination is made (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry for which the display mode flag is not set (Step 135SGS241; N), the prefetch notice setting process ends; if there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set (Step 135SGS241; Y), the prefetch notice setting process is already displayed. It is determined whether there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display preview effect as a pre-read preview effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (Step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (Step 135SGS244a), and the variable category is specified from the fluctuation category command of the entry. (Step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display preview effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variable category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-17, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the pending display preview effect will not be executed (either pending display or active display). The display mode is decided to be the display pattern α) which is white, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 5% using the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or active display is blue), and 0%. It is decided to execute the hold display preview performance in the display pattern γ (the display mode of hold display or active display is red) at a ratio of .

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the time the pending display notice effect will not be executed (the display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white) ), and decided to execute the pending display preview effect at a rate of 20% in display pattern β (the display mode of pending display or active display is blue), and at a rate of 0%, execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern It is decided to execute the process in γ (the display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is super reach, there is a 65% chance that the pending display notice effect will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white). It was decided to execute the pending display preview effect at a rate of 25% in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or active display is blue), and at a rate of 10%, the pending display preview effect was executed in the display pattern γ ( It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or active display in red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided that the pending display notice effect will not be executed at a rate of 15% (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30%. It has been decided to execute the pending display preview effect in display pattern β (display mode of pending display or active display is blue), and the pending display preview effect is executed in display pattern γ (display mode of pending display or active display) at a rate of 55%. (in red).

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the pending display and active display are displayed in red, the probability that the target variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is highest, and when the pending display and active display are displayed in white. It is set so that the probability of the target variable display result being a loss is highest when the result is the highest (Jackpot expectation level according to the display color of the pending display or active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 10-16, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the pending display preview performance in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is decided in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS246; Y), a value (“1” or “2”) corresponding to the determined display pattern is set in the display mode flag of the entry ( Step 135SGS247), the prefetch notice setting process ends.

In addition, if there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (Step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (Step 135SGS243; Y) If it is decided not to execute the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS246; N), set the display mode flag of the entry to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the ``drill'' display preview effect (step 135SGS248); The prefetch notice setting process ends.

In addition, this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form that can be executed as a pending display preview performance by combining a prefetch preview performance that determines the display format of the pending display and a performance that determines the display format of the active display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to separately execute the pre-read preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display as different effects. good.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 10-15 as the specific display display start effect execution process. In the specific display display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether either the specific display display start performance A or the specific display display start performance B is being executed (step 135SGS251). In addition, whether or not specific display display start effect A or specific display display start effect B is being executed is determined by the process timer for specific display display start effect A or the process timer for specific display display start effect B, which will be described later. The determination may be made based on whether or not it is in operation.

If the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), it is determined whether the start winning prize designation command is received (whether the starting winning prize designation command reception flag is set or not). (step 135 SGS 252). If the start winning designation command is not received (step 135SGS252; N), the specific display display start performance execution process is ended. In addition, if a starting winning designation command is received (step 135SGS252; Y), a newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is reserved (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not it is the first special figure pending memory may be determined based on the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (identified entry) is not the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a; N), the process advances to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a; Y), the specified entry is It is determined whether the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not the target of the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS254; Y), the process advances to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display). Then, a process timer for specific display display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

In addition, if the display mode flag of the specified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display) The corresponding process table for specific display display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, a process timer for specific display display start performance B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing Step 135SGS256 or Step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 of the set specific display start effect process table (Step 135SGS259), and executes the specific display start effect execution process. finish.

Further, when the specific display display start effect A or the specific display display start effect B is being executed (Step 135SGS251; Y), the CPU 120 for effect control controls the specific display display start effect process timer (Specific display display start effect) -1 the value of the process timer for production A or the process timer for specific display display start production B) (step 135SGS260), and the process timer for specific display display start production with the value -1 (the process timer for specific display display start production that is currently being executed). It is determined whether the process timer) has timed out (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for the specific display display start performance that is being executed does not time out (step 135SGS261; N), the production device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for the specific display display start performance that is currently being executed. (Step 135SGS262), the specific display display start effect execution process is ended.

In addition, if the process timer for the specific display start effect that is being executed times out (step 135SGS261; Y), whether the process timer for the specific display start effect is the last process timer for the specific display start effect or not. (Step 135SGS263). When the last specific display display start effect process timer times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display display start effect is ended (step 135SGS267), and the specific display display start effect execution process is ended. If the process timer for the last specific display start effect has not timed out (step 135SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next specific display start effect is started, and the process timer for the next specific display start effect is started. The presentation device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the display start presentation process timer (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display display start presentation execution process is ended.

As described above, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting prize has occurred and it is decided not to perform a pre-read preview performance (pending display preview performance) based on the starting winning, or if the starting winning is the second In the case of a starting prize in the starting opening, as shown in Figure 10-19 (A), Figure 10-19 (B), Figure 10-19 (B-1) to Figure 10-19 (B-4). , at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the active display area 135SG005A or the pending memory display areas 135SG005D, 135SG005U, an appearance animation in which the pending display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed as the specific display display start effect A. Ru.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) as the specific display display start effect A is about 0.2 seconds. Then, the pending display (active display) after the end of the specific display display start effect A is the same as the other pending displays and active displays as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect, in the active display area 135SG005A or in the pending memory display area 135SG005D, 135SG005U. Shifts to a rotating animation display.

In addition, if a starting prize has occurred, and it has been decided to execute a pre-read notice performance (pending display notice performance) based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize in the first starting gate, As shown in FIGS. 10-20(A) to 10-20(C) and FIGS. 10-20(C-1) to 10-20(C-4), first, as specific display display start effect B, On the image display device 5, an animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A An animation of moving to the 1 pending storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping a part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 (C-1) to 10-20 (C-4), the character A An animation that attacks (acts on) the position where the hold display is displayed is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which a hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as the specific display display start effect B is The duration is approximately 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the appearance animation of the suspended display is approximately 0.2 seconds. In other words, when performing specific display display start effect B targeting the pending display of the first special drawing, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of a starting prize to the completion of the display of the pending display based on the starting winning. It takes. Then, the hold display after the end of the specific display display start effect B transitions to a rotating animation display in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect, similar to other hold displays and active displays. .

In addition, when the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display display start effect B, if the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special figure pending memory does not exist. An animation of character A moving to active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display is displayed based on the starting prize, as in Figures 10-20 (C-1) to 10-20 (C-4). An animation of attacking (acting) on the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds, The period from the end to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when performing the specific display display start performance B targeting the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the occurrence of a starting prize to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display display start performance B shifts to a rotating animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-described specific display rotation display performance.

10-21 and 10-22 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 10-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display preview effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

If there is an entry in which the display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on a winning start at the first starting opening. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). It should be noted that whether or not the entry is an entry based on a starting prize in the first starting hole may be determined from the starting hole winning designation command stored in the entry.

When the entry is an entry based on a starting prize in the first starting opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state or not (step 135SGS275). If the gaming state is the normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), it is further determined whether the value of the production control process flag is between 0 and 3, that is, whether the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS276). If the value of the production control process flag is one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the fluctuation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether it is reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether the value of the production control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135SGS278). When the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the ready-to-win performance is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined based on the contents of the process data that is variably displayed.

If the value of the performance control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the reach performance is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the performance control CPU 120 executes the winning flash performance based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. Incidentally, the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the winning flash effect flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, if the variable display result is a loss, execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 90%. In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the winning flash performance is executed from the start winning time, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (step 135SG279b). If it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (Step 135SG279b; Y), the winning flash effect flag of the entry (the entry for which the winning flash effect flag is not set) is set as the target of the winning flash effect. is set to "1" indicating that it is a pending memory (step 135SG280), and the winning flash effect execution flag is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is selected, the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in Figure 10-23, the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the starting winning by the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning the prize and the game effect lamp 9. (As shown in FIGS. 10-26(A) and 10-26(B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high brightness C1. This is a performance that causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a sound corresponding to the winning flash performance at a volume V1, and displays the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. In addition, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect in this feature section 135SG is the sound corresponding to the first winning flash effect that is output during the execution of the first winning flash effect, and the second winning flash effect that is output during the execution of the second winning flash effect. When the flash is produced, it is divided into corresponding sound and sound. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, 1 second), such as an electronic sound or the voice sound of a specific character, may be output once. Further, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, it is sufficient to repeatedly output a sound having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the earlier period, such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG, in addition to the above-mentioned sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are generated in different ways using different channels. Simultaneous output from speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is an entry based on winning the second starting slot (step 135SG274; N), and if the gaming state is not the normal state (step 135SG275; N), the performance control process flag is either 0 to 3. If not (Step 135SG276; N), if the variable category of the entry is not Super Reach (Step 135SG277; N), if the reach effect is being executed (Step 135SG279; Y), do not execute the flash effect when winning a prize. If it is determined (Step 135SG279b), the winning flash performance target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that it is not eligible for the winning flash performance (Step 135SG279c), and the winning flash performance execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the winning flash effect execution flag is on in step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271; Y). 135SGS284). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is operating (Step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is -1 (Step 135SGS285), and the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is decreased by 1, and then the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is activated. It is determined whether the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning has timed out (step 135SGS286). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS286; N), the performance control CPU 120 operates the performance device according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period which is being executed. control (step 135SGS287), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Further, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last period winning has timed out (step 135SGS288). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the last previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS288; N), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data and starts the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the next previous period. Then, the production device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for the flash production at the time of winning in the next first period (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Then, in step 135SGS292, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period. In addition, a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is ended. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the first-term winning flash performance, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly emitted in white or red. In addition, the modes corresponding to the flash performance when winning are the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the flash when winning. It is sufficient to cause the lamp 135SG009F to emit light in the same color.

Further, in step 135SGS288, when the process timer for the last first-term winning flash effect times out (step 135SGS288; Y), the performance control CPU 120 ends the first-term winning flash effect (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is selected, the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS294 to 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in Figure 10-23, the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is the period from the end of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period to the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach in the target variable display, when the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning the prize is turned on in the second period. A silhouette image of the character A imitated by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5 by blinking in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect and outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1. This is an effect that displays 135SG005S. As an aspect corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F may repeatedly emit light in white or red, as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half. In addition, since the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the second half is carried out at a lower brightness than the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the first half (see Figure 10-28), the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning a prize in the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter stage is as follows. The light will be emitted in a darker color than the flash effect during the previous period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) has a brightness C2, which is lower than the brightness C1 described above, during a period excluding the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. The light turns on and off (flashing) repeatedly. In particular, the blinking cycle at brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle when executing the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, and during the blinking, as shown in Figures 10-27 (B) to 10-27 (D) Thus, the frame lamp 9b is configured to blink while changing the emitted light color in stages at a plurality of locations in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during a period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period has a lower impression on the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period.

In addition, if the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period is not operating in step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance The value of the winning flash performance process timer is decreased by 1 (step 135SGS298), and it is determined whether the latter winning flash performance process timer that has been decremented by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS299; N), the performance device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of late prize winning which is being executed (step 135SGS300). ), proceed to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later period has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning event in the latter period has timed out (step 135SGS301). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next late prize win is started, and the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next late prize winning is started. The production device is controlled according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In addition, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last late winning time has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first late winning time is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307 are proceeded to.

In step 135SGS307, the performance control CPU 120 controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash performance. In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309) and determines whether the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, the variable display being executed. It is determined whether or not is a variable display subject to a flash effect when winning a prize (step 135SGS310). When the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "0" (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash performance execution process is ended. If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1" (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance (step 135SGS311).

If it is the start timing of the reach effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, turns off the flash effect in progress at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), The flash effect execution process ends.

Moreover, when it is not the start timing of the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). If the symbol confirmation command is received (Step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash performance at the time of winning is ended in the second half, the flash performance execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (Step 135SGS312, Step 135SGS313), and the flash performance execution process is executed at the time of winning. finish. If no symbol confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process is ended without executing the processes of step 135SGS312 and step 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period in this feature section 135SG is a performance that ends when a predetermined performance period (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, while the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period is a performance. This is a performance that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period of time elapses until the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display of the target.

In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target during the execution of the flash performance at the time of late winning, due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the start timing of the said ready-to-win performance At the end timing of the variable display (timing at which the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a later timing, it is possible to end the flash effect at the time of winning a second time including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning anew.

In addition, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 10-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. 10-22, in this feature section 135SG, the performance control CPU 120 uses a process table for performance 1 as a process table for flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period. , and select the production process table 1 as the process table for flash production at the time of winning in the second half. In other words, the performance pattern (performance period) of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period of this feature section 135SG is always the same in the same performance mode and same performance period regardless of the number of retained memories etc. A flash effect and a flash effect when winning a prize in the latter half are executed.

FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decreases each value of the process timer, variable time timer, and variable control timer by 1 (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). Note that the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers that are set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135SGS358). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) The performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the following (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control content of steps 135SGS359 and 135SGS360, the production control CPU 120 outputs variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display compatible sound in the feature section 135SG refers to BGM that corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM that corresponds to the number of pseudo-sequential performances performed during variable display, and the like. In addition, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), the flashing control is performed on the game effect lamp 9 in a manner according to the variable display being executed (step 135SGS363), while the flash at the time of winning in the previous period While the performance is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), the game effect lamp 9 is not controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the game effect lamp 9 is The lamp 9 is controlled to flash in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance execution process (step 135SG364). In the preview performance execution process, for example, at the time when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance while the variable display is being executed, and in which performance pattern the preview performance is executed. It is only necessary to decide in advance whether or not the event will be announced, and to be able to execute the preview performance according to the result of the determination. In addition, when determining the performance pattern of the preview performance in the variable display start setting process described above, one performance pattern is determined from a plurality of performance patterns at different ratios depending on the variable display result, so that the preview performance is The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may vary depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The performance executed as a preview performance in the feature section 135SG is a dialogue preview performance in which characters' lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the jackpot expectation level varies depending on the displayed lines.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-center right decorative symbol (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed from the previous display switching point of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written into a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after executing step 135SGS366, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation command has been received is set (step 135SGS369; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to special symbol hit waiting processing. (Step S173) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control will shift to stopping the variable display, so for example, a variation pattern designation command that indicates a long variation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the process of step 135SGS356, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the effect control of the decorative pattern based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each production device when executing the winning flash production in the feature section 135SG will be explained based on FIGS. 10-28 to 10-68. First, FIG. 10-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a winning flash effect based on the starting winning. Furthermore, Figure 10-28 shows both the case where the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided upon when the execution of the winning flash effect is decided based on the starting winning, and the case where the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. It is a corresponding timing chart. FIGS. 10-29 to 10-48 show the image display device 5 when a starting winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning. It is a diagram showing an effect mode in the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 10-49 to 10-68 show that a starting winning occurs while the variable display is being executed, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the winning flash effect, while it is decided not to execute the pending display preview effect. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect in the image display device 5 and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of a prize win when it is carried out.

In addition, in "When it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect" shown in Figures 10-29 to 10-48, the display mode of the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is display pattern β or This is a case where the display pattern γ is displayed (displayed as a blue or red circle), and as shown in Figures 10-49 to 10-68, while the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided, the pending display notice "When it is decided not to perform the performance" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white circle).

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to a preview performance such as a sound of a character speaking the characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at a volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-29 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-29 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-30(C), and 10-30(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect starts, as shown in Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E), and Figure 10-31 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect B. , An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (if it is the main characteristic part 135SG, the fourth pending display is displayed). An animation that attacks (acts on) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the action took place. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the starting winning, the display is performed before the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. At this time, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect B in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period (FIG. 10-32 (G) and FIG. -32(H)).

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-32 (G), and Figure 10-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2 for the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (period T2>period T1). Furthermore, display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

In addition, at the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emitting mode (blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the attacker lamp 9c and movable lamp 9d) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. The display switches to the corresponding mode (blinking at brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)). In other words, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Returns to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance when winning a prize in the previous period. Incidentally, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y remain off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half.

In addition, as described above, the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) with the brightness C2 and period T0, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, is as follows. The same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29(A)) is a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) are performed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (H), 10-33 (I), and 10-33 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the main feature section 135SG is displayed in blue so that it can be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlappingly with the black image 135SG005B.

Note that in this feature section 135SG, an example is given in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when displayed overlappingly with the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in multiple colors such as the aforementioned blue, green, and red, the jackpot expectation level may be changed depending on which color the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (H) and 10-33 (J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device A small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlappingly, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J), 10-34 (K), and 10-34 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbols and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination that indicates an error (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol confirmation period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-33 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in Figures 10-34 (K) to 10-41 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L, which is the flash performance during the later winning time, The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in Figures 10-38 (S) to 10-40 (X), in the variable display where pseudo-continuous effects are executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 10-40 (W) ) Refer to this feature section 135SG. In the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, a decorative pattern indicating a normal number is temporarily stopped, and a special pattern indicating a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside. ), as a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning a prize, blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5. The silhouette image 135SG005S of is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-40 (W) and 10-40 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not activated. Light is emitted in a light emitting manner corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if it is the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the variable display, light is emitted in blue at brightness C2), and the background image is displayed based on the execution of the variable display again. Returns to the light emission mode according to the . Furthermore, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-42(a) and 10-42(b), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 10-43(c) to FIG. 10-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Furthermore, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-43(d) and 10-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo-continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 10-45 (g) to Figure 10-46 (j)) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-46 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as the latter winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 and period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-45(g) and FIG. 10-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not connected to the decorative pattern. The light is emitted in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop (for example, if it is the first temporary stop, it is blue at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it is green at brightness C2), and the display is re-variable. Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the one corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the feature section 135SG, when performing three pseudo-continuous effects during variable display, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting manner (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and emit light in accordance with the background image based on execution of variable display again. Return to aspect.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-48(m) and 10-48(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, thereby suggesting that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the whiteout timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y end blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d remain off. Then, from the timing when the whiteout ends, in accordance with the above-mentioned reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d respond to the reach effect. The light emission mode (lighting at brightness C1) starts.

Further, during the whiteout period, output of variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound, and from the timing when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, At the same time that the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d begin to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R begin to output a sound corresponding to the reach effect, which is a sound that corresponds to the reach effect. . In addition, as the sound corresponding to the reach effect in this feature section 135SG, BGM, etc., which is different from the sound corresponding to the variable display, must be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach effect) is in progress. Bye.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-28, if a starting prize occurs during execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the corresponding starting door lamp lighting effect will be displayed. From the timing of the starting winning, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, blue if the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern β, and the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern γ). (in red), the light starts emitting light.

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is a performance that is executed completely independently of the above-mentioned winning flash performance, and regardless of the blinking mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned starting Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the starting opening lamp light emission performance (target variable display of the flash performance at the time of winning).

Next, a case will be described in which the execution of the pending display preview performance is not determined together with the flash performance at the time of winning in the starting winning while the variable display is being executed.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, if it is during the execution period of the preview performance, the image display device 5 displays an image according to the performance pattern of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (sound corresponding to the preview performance) is output at volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-49 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-50(C), and 10-50(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 10-49 (B), Figure 10-50 (C), and Figure 10-50 (D), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect A. , an appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect (previous period winning flash effect) gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Figure 10-19 (B-1) to Figure 10-19 (See (B-4)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In particular, when the specific display display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the above-described specific display display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E ends on the image display device 5 (Fig. 10-29~ (See Figure 10-32). In other words, when specific display display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when specific display display start effect B is executed, and the transition to rotation animation is started. There is.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the display is performed before the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. At this time, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. Incidentally, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display display start effect A in the present feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period.

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-52 (G), and 10-52 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (period T2>period T1). Further, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

In addition, at the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emitting mode (blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the attacker lamp 9c and movable lamp 9d) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. The display switches to the corresponding mode (blinking at brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)). In other words, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Returns to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance when winning a prize in the previous period. Incidentally, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y remain off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half.

In addition, as described above, the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) with the brightness C2 and the period T0, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, is as follows. The same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29(A)) is a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-52 (H), 10-53 (I), and 10-53 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-52 (H) and FIG. 10-53 (J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device A small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlappingly, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M.

As shown in FIG. 10-53 (J), FIG. 10-54 (K), and FIG. 10-54 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol confirmation period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Further, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in Figures 10-54 (K) to 10-61 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L as the flash performance during the later winning time, The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in Figures 10-58 (S) to 10-60 (X), in the variable display where pseudo-continuous effects are executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 10-60 (W) ) Refer to this feature section 135SG. In the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, a decorative pattern indicating a normal number is temporarily stopped, and a special pattern indicating a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside. In the latter half of the winning flash performance, the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 Display of silhouette image 135SG005S is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating an error (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is also executed during the variable display symbol determination period when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-61 (Z), even during the symbol determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-60 (W) and 10-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are Light is emitted in a light emitting manner corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if it is the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the variable display, light is emitted in blue at brightness C2), and the background image is displayed based on the execution of the variable display again. Returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-62(a) and 10-62(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 10-63(c) to FIG. 10-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 10-63(d) and FIG. 10-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 10-65 (g) to Figure 10-66 (j) reference).

As shown in FIGS. 10-65(g) and 10-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not connected to the decorative pattern. The light is emitted in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop (for example, if it is the first temporary stop, the light is emitted in blue at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it is green at brightness C2), and the display is re-variable. Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the one corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the feature section 135SG, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during variable display, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting manner (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and emit light in accordance with the background image based on execution of variable display again. Return to aspect.

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-66 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 and period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-68(m) and 10-68(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, thereby suggesting that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the whiteout timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y end blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . These main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, and movable lamps 9d remain off during the whiteout period, but from the timing when the whiteout ends, they emit light in a manner according to the reach effect. .

Further, during the whiteout period, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound, and from the timing when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, At the same time that the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d begin to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R begin outputting the sound corresponding to the reach effect, which is the sound that corresponds to the reach effect. . In addition, as the sound corresponding to the reach effect in this feature section 135SG, BGM, etc., which is different from the sound corresponding to the variable display, must be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach effect) is in progress. Bye.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG, FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. . Furthermore, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a first light emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d as second light emitting means in the present invention. As shown in 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the first-term winning flash effect, and at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T1 during the second-term winning flash effect. While blinking at T2, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d blink at brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half, and at the time of winning in the second half. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, not only the winning flash lamp 135SG009F but also the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker lamp 9c By blinking the movable lamp 9d at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1, it is possible to make the winning flash effect more prominent, so that the game can more easily recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. It has become.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, when a new starting winning occurs during the variable display, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a winning flash effect and whether to execute a pending display notice effect for the pending memory based on the starting winning. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if a new starting winning occurs when the variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, the starting winning winning will be determined. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute a flash effect at the time of winning and whether to execute a pending display notice effect based on the pending memory based on the above. Specifically, when a new starting prize occurs during the variable display, display pattern α to display pattern γ (pending display notice) are displayed in the active display area 135SG005A as specific display display start effect A or specific display display start effect B. After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either display pattern (display pattern in the case of non-execution of the effect or display pattern in the case of execution of the suspended display preview effect), as a specific display rotation display effect, the active display is In addition to executing the rotating display, it is sufficient to execute the winning flash performance (early winning flash performance and later winning flash performance) based on the start of the variable display based on the starting winning.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-15, 10-30 (D) to 10-32 (H), and 10-49 (B) to 10-50 (D), the specific display display start effect is The part where the appearance animation in which the pending display gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed, and Figure 10-15, Figure 10-30 (D) to Figure 10-32 (H), Figure 10-49 (B) to Figure 10 As shown in -50 (D), it consists of a pending display and a rotating animation, and as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-20, from the timing when the pending display appearance animation is completed. , since the rotation animation of the hold display is started, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the hold display.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), when executing specific display display start effect B, as a winning flash effect from a timing before the display start of the pending display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light when winning a prize, it is possible to make the flash performance more prominent when winning a prize. In addition, in this feature section 135SG, even when executing the specific display display start effect A shown in FIGS. 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), the winning flash effect is started from the timing before the display start of the pending display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning can be made more conspicuous.

In addition, the execution period of specific display display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of specific display display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 10-50(D), since the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display display start effect A, the display pattern of the pending display is any one of display patterns α to display patterns γ. Even if the winning flash performance is started before the specific display display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display that is the object of the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-29 (A), Figure 10-29 (B), Figure 10-49 (A), and Figure 10-49 (B), when winning a prize based on the starting prize. When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player can start the flash effect by turning off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d. Recognizable.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are turned off once. Although the present invention is not limited to this, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame The lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are set to emit light at a lower brightness than the previous brightness (for example, if the light was emitted at the brightness C2 up to then, the brightness C3 is lower than the brightness C2). It may be changed. In other words, the "low brightness state" in the present invention refers to a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are emitting light at low brightness, as well as a state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which no light is emitted).

Also, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n) and Figures 10-49 (A) to 10-68 (n), during variable display, a preview effect is being executed. It is possible to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and when it is not in progress, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the flash effect at the time of winning while the variable display is being executed, as shown in Figure 10-29 (B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the winning flash effect is executed while the preview effect is being executed, The sound corresponding to the preview performance is outputted at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the speakers 8L and 8R are outputting the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the preview effect, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be outputted so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting a corresponding sound, a player can easily recognize the execution of a flash performance when winning a prize.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is set to the volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R, so that the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at volume V2, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize is output as the sound corresponding to the preview effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display and the winning flash effect, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a lower volume than the volume V2. (For example, the volume may be output at V3).

Further, in this feature section 135SG, a mode has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. When winning a prize, it is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display. Specifically, if the preview effect is started while the winning flash effect is being executed (while outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect or the sound corresponding to the strange display from speakers 8L and 8R), the winning effect from speakers 8L and 8R will start. It is also possible to temporarily stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect and output only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the preview effect, or only one of the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest due to the player having difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), and 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D), when winning a prize according to the starting prize. When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to quickly make the player aware that a starting winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In addition, this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which after the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started, and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the appearance animation of the pending display are started. You can do it like this.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1, and during the second period winning period flash effect, the winning moment flash By flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C2 (C1>C2), at least by flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C1, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from blinking at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, which obstructs other performances and reduces game interest.

In this feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness C1 and cycle T2 as the first-term winning flash performance, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the second-term winning flash performance. As an example of a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis", a mode is shown in which the light is blinked at a luminance C2 lower than the luminance C1 and at a cycle T2 that is longer than the cycle T1. In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash performance of the feature section 135SG is a low-speed blinking mode where the degree of emphasis is low due to the slow blinking speed (long blinking cycle). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes both a low brightness mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to low brightness, and the present invention is not limited to this. The "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F may be only one of the low-speed blinking mode and the low-intensity mode.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second half is the period during which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period in which the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before and after the start of the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect flashes at a cycle T2. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the first-term winning flash effect, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the second-term winning flash effect, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E can be displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second half, by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, which obstructs other displays and reduces the enjoyment of the game. can be suppressed from decreasing.

In particular, in the main characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in color and the display area on the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. Now, a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume of V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest due to other effects being obstructed by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, while the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is being executed in the latter half, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V2, so that other effects are obstructed by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the present invention has been exemplified as a mode for suppressing a decline in gaming interest, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect while the latter winning flash effect is being executed, other effects may be suppressed when winning a prize. It may also be possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to interference by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize starts. During the symbol confirmation period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink, that is, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the symbol confirmation command has been received (the confirmation command reception flag has been set) or not. Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, the player can be controlled into a jackpot gaming state by continuing to flash the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the symbol confirmation period. The feeling of anticipation can be maintained accurately until the start of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning a prize, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, as a flash performance at the time of winning in the first period, the lamp for the winning flash 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in a mode (brightness) according to the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period. C1 and period T1), and after the end of the first period winning flash performance, as the second period winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set in a mode (brightness C2 and cycle T2) according to the second period winning flash performance. ), while the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are emitted in a manner corresponding to the background image (brightness C2 and period T0), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the first period winning flash performance at the timing when the first period winning flash performance ends, so that the process timer for the first period winning flash performance is cleared during the execution period of the second period winning flash performance. It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d from emitting light in a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-33 (J), the pattern is confirmed. During the period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed with variable display stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the symbol confirmation period, the small symbol 135SG005M is derived in combination to indicate a win. Since it is displayed, the player can be made aware that the symbol confirmation period is in progress.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-33 (J), while the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed overlappingly with the small symbol 135SG005M, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from getting stowed away.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that includes temporary stopping and variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during variable display, and variable display during execution of the winning flash effect. When a pseudo continuous effect is executed in , when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, a special symbol stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 10-40, etc.) Silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the images 135SG005S can be displayed overlappingly, the special symbol is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing his enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-42(a) to 10-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when winning a prize. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the interest of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2 before the start of the reach effect. While the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing, as shown in FIG. 10-22, due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target. If this is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (timing when the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a timing later than the start timing of the reach effect, a second-term winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is performed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the timing of the start of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-22, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the performance control CPU 120 Since the late winning flash performance is ended based on receiving the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort when ending the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-21, if a winning start occurs at the first starting opening while the Super Reach reach effect is being executed, the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined, so the Super Reach reach effect is not decided. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-17, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and active display can be displayed in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations, and as shown in FIG. As shown, when it is decided to display the hold display or active display in the display pattern β or display pattern γ, the starting gate lamp 135SG009S flashes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the lighting mode of the lamp 9, etc., the light is emitted in the color corresponding to the display pattern β or display pattern γ from the occurrence of a starting winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning, so the player can see the pending display or the active display. Since the display mode can also be recognized by the light emission mode (emission color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, the game enjoyment can be improved.

Although the characteristic parts of the present invention have been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, although the flash effect at the time of late winning in the feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is during the symbol confirmation period (while the variable display is stopped), the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figures 10-69 to 10-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect as the winning flash effect in the later period, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette. The display of the image 135SG005S, etc. may not be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-69 and FIG. 10-70(A), while variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the variable display compatible sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (sound corresponding to the preview performance) is output at volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 10-69 and FIG. 10-70 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the first-term winning flash effect. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-71 (C), and 10-71 (D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect starts, as shown in Figure 10-71 (D), Figure 10-72 (E), and Figure 10-72 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect B. , An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (the fourth position in the case of this modification 135SG-1). An animation of attacking (acting) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A acted. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In other words, in this modification 135SG-1, if a starting prize occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, then the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) that accompanies the execution of the specific display display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half (Figure 10-73 (G) and (See Figure 10-73(H)).

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the end timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter half, as shown in Figure 10-69, Figure 10-73 (G) and Figure 10-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1), and the brightness C2 and the period T2 of the gaming effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)), at regular intervals of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. starts to be displayed.

Note that the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T2 is in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-74(I) and 10-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 10-74 (J), FIG. 10-75 (K), and FIG. 10-75 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. As shown in Figures 10-69, 10-76 (M), and 10-76 (N), during the symbol confirmation period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the late The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable The body lamp 9d continues to blink only in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-75 (K) to 10-82 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L as the flash performance during the later winning time, While the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the symbol confirmation period, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the brightness of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at C2 and the blinking period T2, and the image display. The silhouette image 135SG005S is never displayed on the device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-79 (S) to 10-81 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-81 ( See W). In this modified example 135SG-1, a decorative pattern indicating normal numbers is temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a special pattern that notifies the temporary stop is placed in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. (temporarily stops), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash at the time of winning, blinking at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the image display. Display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is executed.

In addition, in Figure 10-81 (W), during the execution of the winning flash effect, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is The brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are not executed, but depending on the timing of the temporary stop, the brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may vary depending on the timing of the temporary stop. Flashing is now performed. That is, in this modification 135SG-1, for the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the winning flash performance is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), even during the symbol determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-81 (W) and 10-81 (X), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display has not ended yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-83(a) and 10-83(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 10-84(c) to FIG. 10-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 10-84(d) and FIG. 10-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 10-86 (g) to Figure 10-87 (j) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-87 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-89(m) and 10-89(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In the present modification 135SG-1, the whiteout of the first display area 135SG005F suggests that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continued.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-69, if a starting prize occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the corresponding starting entrance lamp lighting effect will be displayed. From the timing of the starting winning, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, blue if the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern β, and the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern γ). (in red), the light starts emitting light.

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the winning flash effect described above, and regardless of the blinking mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned starting Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the start lamp light emission performance (target variable display of the flash performance at the time of winning).

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the starting winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as a late winning flash effect during the symbol confirmation period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is in progress due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F being lit continuously during the pattern confirmation period as a flash effect at the time of winning in the later period. ing. Furthermore, during the period of temporary suspension of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are the target of the winning flash performance, and during the temporary suspension period of the decorative symbols of the variable display that are the subject of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is activated. By continuing to blink at the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from mistakenly assuming that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop period.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-1, during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning in the case of winning the lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although a mode in which the display of image 135SG005S is stopped is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is possible to prevent the erroneous recognition that this is the case, output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, turn on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, or display the silhouette image 135SG005S. Alternatively, only two may be executed.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-1, during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the late winning flash performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance as the late winning flash performance, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the display of image 135SG005S, etc. is not executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash as a late winning flash effect during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may receive a symbol confirmation command during execution of the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, during the pattern confirmation period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the time of winning is output as the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the light emission of the lamp 135SG009F for flash at the time of winning, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, based on the reception of the first variable display start command, the performance control CP 120 selects the flash performance process table for later prize winnings and resets and starts the process timer for the flash performance for late prize winnings. By doing this, it is only necessary to start the flash effect at the time of winning (the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of the new variable display.

In addition, as a mode in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F does not emit light as the late winning flash performance during the symbol confirmation period during the execution period of the latter winning flash performance, for example, the performance control CPU 120 may Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command during execution of the performance, the lamp control board 14 is sent to the lamp control board 14 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, instead of the lighting control data according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of late winning. Lighting control data that maintains the lights off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating lights off as the RGB value of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be output continuously until the variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if you do not execute the flash effect at the time of winning during the symbol confirmation period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning will be output from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning time will be turned on, and the silhouette image will be displayed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see Figure 10-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect may be output, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be turned on, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash performance at the time of late winning, during the symbol determination period of the variable display, the flash performance from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash performance at the time of late winning While stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S, it also stops the output of the flash effect compatible sound and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d will continue to flash in this manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also be stopped. In particular, as a form of stopping the blinking of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d during the symbol confirmation period, the in-lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are stopped during the pattern confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d may be set to a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the pattern determination period. It may also be maintained in a state where it is continuously lit (color corresponding to the image).

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, in the explanation of FIG. 10-8, it is stated that a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the super reach effect. If you set up a reach effect, make the jackpot expectation different between the reach effects of multiple super reach (for example, as a reach effect of super reach, the reach effect of super reach α and the reach effect of super reach α are different) It is also possible to provide a reach effect with a high super reach β.

In particular, when it is possible to perform reach effects of multiple super reaches with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. 10-90(A) and 10-90(B) as modification example 135SG-2. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) and a presentation position (for example, a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and a flash presentation when winning a prize. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (a variable display that executes a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the production position described above) during the period in which the first display area 135SG005F except for the first display area 135SG005F is once white-out, the movable body 32 Execute a moving body motion suggestion performance that suggests moving to the performance position, and when winning a prize, the variable display that is the target of the flash performance will be a variable display with a variation pattern of Super Reach β (Execute the reach performance of Super Reach β) (variable display), the movable body 32 is further evacuated after the above-described movable body motion suggestion effect is executed during a period in which the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is once whited out. A movable body motion performance may be performed in which the moving body is moved from a position to a performance position.

By doing this, during the whiteout period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position (when the movable body movement performance is executed) Since the player can be informed that the movable body motion performance will execute the reach performance of super reach β, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach performance of super reach α, the game enjoyment can be improved.

For example, if the target of the flash effect when winning a prize is a variable display with a variable pattern of super reach α, the target of the flash effect when winning a prize is When the variable display starts, output of sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 10-91(B), FIG. 10-92(C), and FIG. 10-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 10-93 (E) to Figure 10-94 (H) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-94 (H)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a later winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at brightness C2 and period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-95 (I) to 10-96 (L), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F temporarily whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white). In addition, in this modification 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 10-90(A) and FIG. 10-96(K) to FIG. 10-97(N), during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F The lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. As a movable body motion suggestion performance, the movable body motion suggestion performance is based on the fact that the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocates between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (4 reciprocations in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). The whiteout period will end as well. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion production, the output of the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion production is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. Note that the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be a sound effect that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position (for example, a sound effect such as "rattle"). ) etc. can be output.

As shown in FIG. 10-90(A), FIG. 10-98(O), and FIG. 10-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggestion presentation and whiteout are finished, the image display device 5 At the same time as the reach effect of Reach α starts, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and winning flash lamp 135SG009F start lighting with brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. Then, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the ready-to-reach effect sound (such as BGM different from the variable display compatible sound) corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach α.

In addition, if the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β, as shown in Figure 10-99 (A) and Figure 10-99 (B), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β. When the variable display starts, output of sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 10-99(B), FIG. 10-100(C), and FIG. 10-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figures 10-101 (E) to 10-102 (H) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-102 (H)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a later winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-103 (I) to 10-104 (L), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F temporarily becomes white-out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white). In addition, in this modification 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 10-90(B) and FIG. 10-104(K) to FIG. 10-105(N), during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F The lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. Then, as a movable body motion suggestion performance, the movable body motion is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocates between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion production, the output of the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion production is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. Note that the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be a sound effect that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position (for example, a sound effect such as "rattle"). ) etc. can be output.

After the movable body motion suggestion effect ends, the whiteout period ends and the movable body motion effect appears, as shown in Figure 10-90(B) and Figures 10-106(O) to 10-106(P). As a result, the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the presentation position by a drive mechanism (not shown). In addition, during the period of the movable body movement performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set to brightness C1 in accordance with the movable body movement performance. Light. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 10-90(B), the speakers 8L and 8R output sound corresponding to the moving body motion effect at the volume V1 (see FIG. 10-106(P)). Note that, as the sound corresponding to the movable object movement effect in the feature section 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "Zudoon") that allows the player to recognize that the movable object has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-107(Q), the movable body motion performance ends based on the movable body 32 returning from the performance position to the retracted position. As shown in FIG. 10-90(B), FIG. 10-107(Q), and FIG. 10-107(R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 displays super reach. At the same time as the reach effect of β starts, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at a brightness C1 corresponding to the reach effect. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the ready-to-reach effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect of super reach β. In addition, as for the reach effect sound corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach β, the variable display compatible sound and the reach effect of Super Reach α are available so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of Super Reach β is in progress. It is sufficient to output BGM or the like that is different from the reach performance compatible sound corresponding to the performance.

As described above, in the present modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of super reach, which is the target of the winning flash effect, before the start of the super reach reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and cycle T2. From the start timing of the super reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at a brightness of C2. In other words, when the reach effect starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at a brightness of C2 and Instead of blinking at the period T2, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect (lighting up at a brightness of C2), so the game enjoyment of the ready-to-reach effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in Figures 10-96(K) to 10-98(O) and Figures 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout). At the same time, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is then turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of the Super Reach reach effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning a prize is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body movement suggestion effect will be executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body movement suggestion effect will be executed. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of , and then, in response to the execution of the movable body movement effect (movement of the movable body 32 to the effect position), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to the movable body movement effect. It lights up at brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, since the lighting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning a prize is turned on at a brightness of C1 after turning off due to the execution of the movable object motion suggestion effect, it is important to note that these changes in the lighting mode may give a sense of discomfort to the player. Since it can be prevented, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the feature section 135SG, a form in which a dialogue preview performance can be executed as a preview performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot during variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , as modification example 135SG-3, the preview performance includes, in addition to the dialogue preview performance, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes step by step, and you can expect a jackpot depending on the final number of change stages. It may also be possible to perform a step-up effect with different degrees, a group preview effect in which a plurality of characters cross the image display device 5, or the like.

In particular, when it is possible to perform a step-up effect as the modified example 135SG-3, when winning a prize, as shown in FIGS. When executing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a flash effect is not being executed, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image in stages is determined for the winning flash. The effect of the step-up performance may be enhanced by temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C2. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-108(B) and FIG. 10-114(A) to FIG. 10-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display where the winning flash effect is being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already been flashed at the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the right timing. In other words, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, is turned on in response to the step-up effect. In some embodiments, the light may not be emitted.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the winning flash effect, that is, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already been set to the brightness C2 as the winning flash effect. In addition, if a step-up effect that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F while it is blinking at cycle T2 is started, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from starting at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the winning flash performance in a manner corresponding to the step-up performance.

Furthermore, in the feature section 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the super reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the start of the super reach reach effect, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it is possible to execute a movable body motion performance in which the movable body 32 is moved from a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) to a performance position (for example, a center front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5). By doing so, it may be possible to notify the player that the super reach effect will be executed.

In this way, if it is possible to execute the movable body motion effect before the super reach effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-119(A) and 10-119(B) as modification 135SG-4, When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect. The expectation level of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on which of the light emission modes is changed depending on the reach performance of the super reach.

For example, as shown in Figure 10-119 (C), if the variable display result of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is a jackpot, at the start of the variable display, the movable body It has been decided to change the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the timing of the start of the movement effect from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect, and the reach effect starts at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect. If the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a loss, at the start of the variable display, from the movable body movement effect start timing, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F It has been decided to change the light emitting mode from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect, and the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the reach effect at a rate of 70%. It is decided to change the light emission mode from a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect.

In addition, if it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect, the said decision. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be controlled in accordance with the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in accordance with the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in this modification example 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to determine whether the flash is in progress during the execution period of the movable body movement effect or when the super In some cases, it may be during the execution period of the reach effect of Reach, so it is necessary to check whether the flash effect at the time of winning will end during the execution period of the moving body movement effect or during the execution period of the reach effect of Super Reach. It can be easily recognized by people. In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C), the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body motion performance according to the movable body motion performance. Since the expectation level of a jackpot is different depending on whether the flash mode is set according to the start timing of the reach effect or when the light emission mode is set according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect when winning a prize. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-4, the timing at which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changes to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement effect or the light emission mode according to the reach effect). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game can be played according to the timing when the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends blinking as the winning flash effect. It may also be possible to suggest the setting values set in the device 1. By doing so, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the end timing of the winning flash effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body movement performance during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance or at the start of the super reach reach performance. The mode can be changed, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance. Since the level of expectation for a jackpot differs depending on the start timing of the reach effect and when the light emission mode is changed according to the reach effect, the player pays attention to the effect that is executed at the timing when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the present modification example 135SG-4, in the variable display of super reach, a form in which a movable body movement performance can be executed before the start of the reach performance of super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion performance, a movable body motion suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the movable body motion performance may be made possible. In this way, when it is possible to execute the movable body motion suggestion effect before executing the movable body motion effect, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to suggest the movable body motion. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion display, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash display to the movable body motion suggestion display. The jackpot expectation level may be different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set according to the movable body motion suggestion performance from the start timing and the case where the light emission mode is set according to the ready-to-reach performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance that is being executed when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. There are two cases in which the light emission (blinking) of the time flash lamp 135SG009F ends at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and another time it ends at the start timing of the reach effect, and when the light emission of the time flash lamp 135SG009F occurs. The expectation level of the jackpot may be set to differ depending on whether the game ends at . In this way, even when providing multiple timings for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance during the variable display of 1, the performance control CPU 120 may cause the winning flash to stop due to the generation of static electricity, etc. If it is not possible to stop the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, at the end timing of the variable display (timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command), which is a timing later than these timings, the late prize winning including the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be resumed. All you have to do is end the flash effect.

By doing this, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash performance cannot be stopped at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance or the start timing of the reach performance, the winning flash performance will continue. At the end timing of the target variable display, it is possible to end the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, as display patterns for specific displays (pending display and active display), a display pattern α having the lowest jackpot expectation level is a white round shape, and a blue color display pattern having a higher jackpot expectation level than the display pattern α. The present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. As the display pattern, display patterns other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modified example 135SG-5, the display pattern of the specific display includes, in addition to the above-mentioned display patterns α to display pattern γ, any one of the pending display or the active display. Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with blinking white color, may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of display pattern β or display pattern γ (low expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ) The possibility of changing to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any timing during display is higher than display pattern δ (expectation level of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high) A certain character-shaped circle A display pattern ε may be provided.

In other words, among display patterns α to γ of the pending display and active display in Modified Example 135SG-5, display pattern γ (red display) has the highest jackpot expectation, display pattern α (white display) ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot expectation of display pattern δ and display pattern ε when display pattern β and display pattern γ do not change, the jackpot expectation may be set lower than display pattern α, or lower than display pattern α. The jackpot expectation level may also be set to be higher than that of the display pattern β, and the jackpot expectation level may be set lower than that of the display pattern β.

Further, in this modification example 135SG-5, display patterns δ and display patterns ε, which can change to display patterns β and display patterns γ, are provided as display patterns for hold display and active display. The display pattern α is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display pattern α changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, there may be a case where the pending display or active display of the display pattern β changes to the display pattern γ.

Furthermore, the feature section 135SG determines whether or not to execute a pending display preview effect (a display that displays a pending display or an active display in display pattern β or display pattern β) and the display pattern, as well as determining whether to execute a flash effect when winning a prize. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. You may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, if it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning time, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning is , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern γ. It is sufficient to determine the display pattern α at a low ratio and determine the display pattern α at the lowest ratio (determination ratio of the display pattern when deciding to execute the flash effect at the time of winning: display pattern ε > display pattern δ > display pattern γ > display pattern β > Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to display patterns ε are provided as display modes for specific displays (hold display and active display), and when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since there is a higher probability that the winning flash effect is executed at the same time than when pattern β or display pattern γ is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to a specific display by executing the winning flash effect, and also to draw the player's attention to the specific display. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern δ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blinking white circle, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color or blinking mode.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to display pattern β or display depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. Although the rate at which the pattern changes to pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, a flash effect is displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ may vary depending on whether or not the specific display is being executed. By doing this, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In Modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ that blinks in white is exemplified as a special aspect of the specific display in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention is not limited to this. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color other than white, blue, or red (for example, purple or black), which are the normal mode or special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

In addition, in the present modification 135SG-5, a mode was exemplified in which the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ to suggest that the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to perform an action effect that can change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of an action presentation, multiple presentation modes (with different ratios of changing the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ) may be used as the presentation mode of the action presentation. For example, a first effect that can change a specific display displayed in display pattern δ to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on a specific display displayed in display pattern δ, and an effect that has a different presentation mode from the first effect and effect. A second effect effect is provided that can change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ. When the second effect is executed, the winning flash effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed.

By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the effect is executed as the first effect or the second effect, and by executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the effect is changed to the second effect. It is possible to increase expectations for what will be carried out in the action presentation.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the rate at which the winning flash effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. Therefore, if a specific display is displayed in display pattern ε and a flash effect is executed at the time of winning, the player will be discouraged by the change in the display pattern of the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ. Since the player can attract attention, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern for a specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. Although a form in which the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 135SG-6, the character as the specific display It may be possible that the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on another character as a result of the effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-121 (A) and 10-121 (B), when the number of 1st special symbols reserved is 3 and is being displayed in a variable manner, a prize is entered in the 1st starting slot. (starting prize) occurs, and when the display pattern of the pending display based on the starting winning is determined to be the display pattern ε as a pending display preview effect based on the starting winning, the fourth block of the first pending storage display area 135SG005D An ally character is displayed as a pending display, and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to an enemy character (see FIG. 10-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(A) and 10-122(B), When an ally character (suspended display of display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth suspended display to the display position of the third suspended display, the ally character moves from the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Act (shoot) against.

Then, each time the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(C) and 10-122(D), the variable display is When the ally character displayed in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display, the ally character displayed in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display. When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first suspended display, the friendly character acts (shoots) at the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the target of the pending display preview effect starts, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as active. The player moves to area 135SG005A, and the ally character acts directly on the enemy character within the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-123 (G) and 10-123 (H), if the ally character wins as a result of the battle performance, the ally character is displayed in the display pattern β or in the active display area 135SG005A. The display changes to active display of display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-123 (I) and 10-123 (J), if the ally character is defeated as a result of the battle performance, the enemy character or ally character is displayed in the display pattern in the active display area 135SG005A. Changes to active display of α.

In this modification example 135SG-6, when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, an ally character serving as a pending display in the display pattern ε defeats an enemy character in active display area 135SG005A, and the active display is performed. Although we have exemplified a form in which the ally character that has become ``can be changed to an active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ, the present invention is not limited to this, and when displaying a suspended display in display pattern ε, By defeating the enemy character while the pending display is being displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the friendly character serving as the pending display may be changed to the pending display of display pattern β or display pattern γ.

In addition, when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, when a winning flash effect is executed at the same time, the display pattern ε is displayed at a higher rate than when a winning flash effect is not executed. may be changeable to a pending display (or an active display) of display pattern β or display pattern γ. By doing this, not only can the player's attention be drawn to the battle result between the friendly character and the enemy character as a pending display of the display pattern ε, but also the winning flash effect can be executed while the battle is being executed. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether there is a player or not, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the modified example 135SG-5 and the modified example 135SG-6, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε are added to the display patterns α to γ described in the feature section 135SG as display patterns for the hold display and the active display. , but when displaying a hold display or an active display using these display patterns δ or display pattern ε, it is the same as when displaying a hold display or an active display using display patterns α to display patterns γ. Then, specific display display start effect A or specific display display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when displaying a pending display or an active display using the display pattern δ, execute the specific display display start effect A (see Figure 10-19) as in the case of the display pattern α, and display the pending display or active display. When displaying with display pattern ε, as in the case of display pattern β and display pattern γ, the specific display display start effect B (see Figure 10-20) or the period during which the display of the pending display or active display is completed is specified. A specific display start effect that is longer than the display start effect A and shorter than the specific display start effect B may be executed. By doing this, when displaying a pending display or an active display in the display pattern δ or display pattern ε, as in the characteristic section 135SG, from a timing before the display of the pending display or active display is completed. , the player will be able to recognize the winning flash effect sound and the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Further, in the feature section 135SG, as an example of a winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modification 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changeable in stages according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-124 (A) and 10-124 (B), when the winning ( When a winning (starting prize) occurs and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, as shown in Figure 10-124(B), The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-124(B), the winning flash effect starts from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2), and , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-125(C) and 10-125(D), display of the effect image 135SG005E is started from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5, and the winning flash Blinking control of the lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the cycle T1 is started. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 10-125 (D), Figure 10-126 (E), and Figure 10-126 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display display start effect B. , An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is controlled to blink, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (if it is the main characteristic part 135SG, the fourth pending display is displayed). An animation that attacks (acts on) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the action took place. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in FIGS. 10-127 (G) and 10-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning starts from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2. , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and cycle T2 (Figure 10- 27(A) to blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 10-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. Ru.

Note that the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T2 is in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-128(I) and 10-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 10-128 (J), FIG. 10-129 (K), and FIG. 10-129 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late winning in this modification 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether or not it is the symbol confirmation period. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-128 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

In addition, in this variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-129(K) and 10-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. In this way, by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display, the silhouette image is displayed overlappingly in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIG. 10-130(M) and FIG. 10-130(N), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbol and the small symbol 135SG005M are displayed in the combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol confirmation period, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-130(N), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed overlappingly with the active display area 135SG005A. Furthermore, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, it is possible to display either of two silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a large-sized silhouette can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed in an overlapping manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the large-sized silhouette image 135SG005S The active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect is executed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and improve their interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when winning a prize, and depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active Since the overlapping aspect with the display area 135SG005A is different, the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases in which the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases in which they do not overlap. , the present invention is not limited to this, but in the case where the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, when the active display area 135SG005A A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there is a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap. Before the start of the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect, the display overlaps with the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap with the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A, which is the target of the winning flash effect, while the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is being executed. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize the pending display and active display that correspond to the flash effect when winning a prize, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides not only the pending display but also the active display. It is possible to improve the game's interest by adding even more surprise to the game.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-7, only one of the pending display and the active display is hidden by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the pending display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-7, a form is exemplified in which the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlappingly in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect as exemplified in the feature section 135SG, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, The silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when winning a prize may be displayed overlappingly on the special symbol (see FIG. 10-40, etc.) that stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C. By doing this, the special symbol for notifying the temporary stop is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning, so it is possible to give surprise to the player and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect of the present invention, a form in which the special symbol stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a re-variable display effect, an image different from the special symbol may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping with this image.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, if a starting winning at the first starting opening occurs during execution of the super reach reach effect, execution of the winning flash effect based on the starting winning is not determined (determined to be non-executable). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as a modified example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs in the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the variable display The remaining period may be specified, and if the specified period is less than the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, execution of the winning flash effect may not be determined (determined not to be executed). By doing this, the winning flash effect (previous period winning flash effect) is executed when the remaining period of the variable display is shorter than the execution period of the previous winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the specific display (pending display or active display) of the target of the performance from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in the present modification example 135SG-8, a mode is exemplified in which it is determined whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning a prize based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the flash effect when winning a prize depends on the remaining period of the variable display and the period other than the execution period of the flash effect when winning the previous period (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a criterion.

Furthermore, in this modification example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs at the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined if the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the winning flash effect, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it may be possible to perform a winning flash effect from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the super reach reach effect and the winning flash effect from becoming less interesting due to the overlap of the super reach effect and the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is blinking at a brightness C1 and a cycle T1 (the light emitting mode in the previous winning flash effect), and a blinking mode with a brightness C2 and a cycle T2. There are two lighting modes: blinking (lighting mode in the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half). On the other hand, the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp lighting effect includes blue light emission at a brightness C2 according to the display pattern β, and red light emission at a brightness C2 according to the display pattern γ. It is provided. In other words, the feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emission effect are changed. The number of aspects may be different.

In particular, as shown in modification example 135SG-5, display patterns δ and display patterns ε are provided as display patterns for the hold display and active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the light emission mode of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission effect. By providing a light emission mode according to the display pattern ε, the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance can be set to be greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash display. good. By doing this, the variation of the light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S increases, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the feature section 135SG, an example is given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to emit light as a winning flash effect, and the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is made to emit light in a starting door lamp light emission effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect may be set larger than the light emitting area where the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting gate lamp light display. good.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the case where it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is activated when the starting winning occurs. On the other hand, the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect on the variable display that is the target of the starting prize winning flash effect, while the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect on the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display (which is the target of the flash effect), by applying the modified example 135SG-10, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will emit light in accordance with the winning flash effect for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the light emitting mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S while preventing a decrease in gaming interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, a mode in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking is illustrated as the starting lamp lamp lighting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting lamp lamp 135SG009S is not limited to this. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starting port lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the starting port lamp light emission effect in this way, the blinking cycle of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is set to the blinking period (period T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. It may be different. In this way, by making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F different from the blinking cycle of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S, players pay attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the feature section 135SG has a configuration in which the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, etc. are temporarily turned off when performing a flash effect upon winning. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-11, when performing a flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight etc. built in the image display device 5 is The winning flash effect may be started after the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5. In this manner, when the winning flash performance is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced to make it easier for the player to recognize the start of the winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image display device 5 is changed to a low visibility state in which visibility is lower than the previous state by changing the brightness of the device 5, the present invention is not limited to this. Forms of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5 include, in addition to reducing the 5 luminance (brightness) of the image display device, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5; The movable body 32 is moved in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is moved repeatedly in the vertical direction, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display the image on the image display device 5. It may also be something that reduces the visibility of the image being displayed.

In other words, a "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility on the image display device 5 is lower than the immediately previous state, and is defined as a state in which the visibility on the image display device 5 is lowered than the previous state. Contains images that reduce visibility.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to a starting winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as a modified example 135SG-12, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing in response to a winning start. If it is decided to execute, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. You can. By doing this, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that a starting winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided by the blinking (light emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-12, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a hold display is displayed. An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning at the volume V1, The lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning the award is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , Outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C1 and cycle T1, and temporarily displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5. You may. By doing this, even during the execution period of the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half, the sound corresponding to the flash performance when winning a prize is output at the volume V1 from speakers 8L and 8R, as in the flash performance when winning a prize in the first half, and the sound for the flash performance when winning a prize is output at volume V1. By flashing the lamp 135SG009F at a brightness C1 and a period T1 and displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect will start. Since it is easy to play, it can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the second period winning flash effect, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the same as during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, The speakers 8L and 8R temporarily output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T1 at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the later period, the winning time flash effect by the speakers 8L and 8R is Execute only one or two of the following: outputting a sound compatible with flash effects at volume V1, blinking flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C1 and period T1 when winning a prize, and displaying effect image 135SG005E on image display device 5. You can do it like this.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of this specification has a jackpot probability that differs depending on the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), a pending display notice effect based on a starting win, and a flash effect at the time of winning. It is possible to perform the winning flash effect and the light emission mode changes depending on the lamp (characteristic section 135SG, Figures 10-1 to 10-68), and during the winning time flash effect during the variable display pattern confirmation period. (Modified Example 135SG-1, Figures 10-69 to 10-89), it is possible to perform super reach reach performances with different jackpot expectations, and the movable body movement is performed before the reach performance with high jackpot expectations. If the performance can be executed and the movable body movement performance is executed, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement performance. (Modification 2, Figures 10-90 to 10-107), it is possible to perform a step-up effect during variable display, and if the step-up effect is executed when the winning flash effect is not executed, the winning flash While the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash emits light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect, if the step-up effect is executed while the winning flash effect is being executed, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash effect. One that does not change from the corresponding light emission mode (Modification 135SG-3, Figures 10-108 to 10-118), it is possible to execute a movable body movement performance before the start of the reach performance of super reach, and the lamp for flashing when winning a prize When the light emitting mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emitting mode according to the flash effect when winning a prize to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect from the start timing of the movable body movement effect, and from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emitting mode according to the reach effect. The jackpot expectation level differs depending on the lighting mode (Modified Example 135SG-4, Figure 10-119), and display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes for pending display and active display. The ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different depending on the execution of the winning flash effect due to winning a prize (Modification 135SG-5, Figure 10- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern of the hold display, the display pattern ε changes to any of the display patterns α to γ according to the execution of the action effect (Modification 135SG- 6, Fig. 10-121 to Fig. 10-123), the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning (Modification 135SG-7, Fig. 10-124 to Fig. 10-130), etc., but the pachinko game machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of features and modifications. good.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described later may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. It has a light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a display area capable of displaying an image, and the display area A display image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I or a display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a second interface image (006SG005J) and displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display; storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) and a display image of the game-related information; display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc. shown in FIG. 14-5), and the plurality of display layers image processing means (e.g., display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in a specific display effect that displays the specific display (for example, a part that displays a hold display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) and a specific light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light based on the occurrence of the specific display. (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) an effect control CPU 120), the storage means is configured to set the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area to a first position (for example, if it is a characteristic part 006SG, the display position of the image display device 5); display position displacement information for displacing the display area from the central part of the area) to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the upper position or lower position of the display area of the image display device 5). can be stored (for example, the CGROM 205 stores displacement image data), and the image processing means uses the display position displacement information to convert the specific image arranged in the specific display layer based on the image data. (For example, as shown in Figure 14-23, it is possible to generate a displacement specific image that is displaced based on the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. By superimposing the images to create a displacement target image and applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the left area 006SG005L and the right area are displayed as display images on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. (a part that creates an image in which the image of 006SG005R moves upward and the image of middle area 006SG005C moves downward); 10-28, 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), 10-32 (H), and 10-32 (H). As shown in FIGS. 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on before the display of the pending display is completed) is generated by the image processing means. It is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) in which the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game-related information is such that the arranged image is The first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are arranged in a special display layer that is displayed preferentially in the display area than the display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are arranged in (a portion drawn in a layer 1 image drawing area with a high value), the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, As shown in 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed), the light emitting means is a first light emitting device. means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F), and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d), The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (a part that flashes at a cycle T1 and flashes at a brightness C2 and a cycle T2 during the second period winning flash effect execution period), the second light emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the first period. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a manner according to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d , a part that blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and a part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0 during the second period of the winning flash effect.

According to such a configuration, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first light emission effect of the specific light emission effect becomes easier. During one period, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for players to recognize the specific display. In addition, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. A specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to the case where image data of a specific image is exclusively stored. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing when a specific performance is executed.

In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily recognize a specific display that is a target of a specific light emitting effect depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and also to be able to execute a specific effect with a small amount of data. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from deteriorating during execution. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that can execute a specific performance with a small amount of data without reducing the visibility of a display image of game-related information so that the performance is easy for players to understand when installed in a game parlor.

Furthermore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the specific effect can be executed with a small amount of data, and the visibility of the display image of game-related information decreases. An example of a gaming machine that can prevent this is a gaming machine that can perform variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that has a display area that can display an image, and that has a display area that can display an image. A display image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I or a display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a second interface image (006SG005J), a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area, and a display image of the game-related information. A storage means (e.g., CGROM 205) capable of storing at least image data, and a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area and a layer 2 image drawing area shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged. area, layer 3 image drawing area, displacement image creation area, display image creation area, etc.), and can generate an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers. image processing means (for example, the display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a variable display as shown in FIGS. 14-17) capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area. a portion that executes a medium rendering process), and the storage means sets the display position of at least a portion of the specific image in the display area to a first position (for example, if it is a characteristic portion 006SG, the image display device 5 display position displacement for displacing the display area from the central part of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, the upper position or lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) information can be stored in the CGROM 205 (for example, a portion of the CGROM 205 stores displacement image data), and the image processing means places the specific image arranged in the specific display layer based on the image data at the display position. It is possible to generate a displacement specific image that is displaced based on the displacement information (for example, as shown in Figure 14-23, a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area) can be generated. By superimposing the image with the image to create a displacement target image and applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the left area 006SG005L and the display image displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance are created. (a part that creates an image in which the image of the right area 006SG005R moves upward and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward), the effect execution means is configured to generate the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means. It is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) that is displayed in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game-related information is such that the arranged image is higher than the specific display layer. The first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are arranged in a special display layer that is preferentially displayed in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. An example is a gaming machine (portion drawn in one image drawing area). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 11 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 11(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 11(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, the above-mentioned hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 12, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common winning judgment value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the previous setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, if the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal or time saving, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 006SG in embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic part 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained.

The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can perform variable display,
It has a display area that can display images, and the display area contains game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and the small display area that is smaller than the decorative symbols). a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a pattern);
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 14-5) etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
an effect execution means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 14-17);
Equipped with
The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (the part where image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23). A displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means is configured to display a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG, a reach suggestion in the modified example 006SG-1) that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display. performance, revival performance in modification example 006SG-2, look-ahead preview performance in modification example 006SG-3, promotion performance in modification example 006SG-5, temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification performance in modification example 006SG-6). be,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display position of the specific image can be changed from the first position to the first position by simply using the image data for displaying the specific image in the display area and the display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image. Since the specific effect can be executed by displacing the image to two positions, the amount of data stored in the storage means for executing the specific effect can be reduced compared to the case where the specific effect is executed using dedicated image data. .

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine described in form A1,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface Image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a specific effect is executed, the display position of the game-related information together with at least a part of the specific image is not displaced, so that the game-related information is difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is executed. You can prevent this from happening.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine described in form A2,
At least some of the game-related information is displayed in an area that overlaps with the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion presentation). duplicate parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position and becomes the displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed overlapping with the displaced specific image, so the player feels that something is wrong. You can recognize game-related information without any problems.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to form A2,
At least some of the game-related information is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area during the development suggestion presentation). (a portion displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with each image of area 006SG005R),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position and becomes a displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displacement specific image, so the player can accurately can recognize game-related information.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A2 to A4,
Comprising gaming identification information variable display execution means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of variably displaying the gaming identification information (for example, special symbols). ,
The performance execution means is
In a first area within the display area, it is possible to variably display the performance identification information in accordance with the variable display of the gaming identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, the image display device 5 (In the center of the display area, a portion where a decorative pattern can be displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern),
In a second area that is different from the first area in the display area and is smaller than the first area, it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information in accordance with the variable display of the gaming identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion where small symbols can be displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of special symbols),
The display image of the performance identification information is arranged in the specific display layer, and changes from a first visibility state to a second visibility state that is less visible to the player than the first visibility state according to execution of the specific performance. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5. areas where visibility decreases when moving upward or downward from the center of the display area),
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged in the special display layer, and the visibility state does not change from the first visibility state according to the execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-23). As shown, the small designs are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative designs, they do not move from the top right of the display area of the image display device 5 when performing the development suggestion effect, so the visibility is not reduced. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visual recognition state of the performance identification information changes from the first visual recognition state to the second visual recognition state by executing a specific performance, so that the performance effect of the specific performance can be improved, and the performance can be reduced by executing the specific performance. Since the visible state of the identification information does not change from the first visible state, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the reduced identification information even during execution of a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, the upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 14-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, the lower area shown in FIG. 14-31). 006SG005B),
The performance execution means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. (a portion where a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displacement specific image (for example, As shown in 14-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
When displacing the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area, the first specific display area and the second specific display area are moved at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area. 2 Displaying an effect image different from the image displayed in the specific display area (for example, cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIG. 14-31);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to more effectively make the player recognize the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a specific effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine described in form A6,
The effect execution means is capable of displacing the first specific display area in a first direction as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect; The display area can be displaced in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction (for example, as shown in FIG. (as shown in FIG. 14-31(E), the part that moves the upper region 006SG005T upward and the lower region 006SG005B downward),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as the specific effect is the displacement of the first specific display area in the first direction and the second specific display area in the second direction opposite to the first direction. By executing this as a displacement in the direction, the performance effect of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine described in form A6 or form A7,
The amount of displacement of the first specific display area and the amount of displacement of the second specific display area in the specific effect are different (for example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, an upper area 006SG005T and a lower area 006SG005B as a pre-read preview effect) When the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions, the amount of movement (displacement) is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of a specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A6 to A8,
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the cut effect image 006SG005S is (portions drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as images with higher display priority than designs and background images),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the display position of a specific image changes as a specific effect, the display position of the effect image does not change, so the displacement of the display position of the specific image can be made more noticeable by comparing these specific images and the effect image. This allows the production effect of a specific production to be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A6 to A9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
The effect execution means can display the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, a portion where the crack effect image 006SG005H can be displayed in two colors, blue and red; As shown in Figure 14-33, the part where the cutting effect image 006SG005S can be displayed in three colors of blue, green, and red),
The rate at which the effect image is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the display mode in which the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, in which color the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed. (as shown in FIG. 14-33, the part where the jackpot expectation differs depending on which color the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the specific performance, the performance effect of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A10,
The specific performance is a performance in which the specific image changes in stages (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development suggestion performance of the characteristic part 006SG, it is displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R). As shown in Figure 14-27, in the revival performance of modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside gradually expands and the amount of movement of the image gradually increases. As shown in Figure 14-35, where the amount of movement of the fragments that make up the decorative pattern gradually increases, the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image gradually increases in the promotion performance of modification 006SG-5. going part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the specific performance can be improved by changing the specific image in stages.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine described in form A11,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, the development suggestion of the characteristic part 006SG In the presentation, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, As shown in FIG. 14-27, in the revival performance of Modified Example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside gradually move from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area. The part that moves, the part where the decorative design and background image are gradually distorted to the left in the promotion production of modified example 006SG-5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to emphasize the displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific performance, so that the entertainment of the performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine described in form A11,
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image pieces (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-28, a part in which a decorative pattern is composed of a plurality of pieces),
The specific effect is an effect in which the number of the displayed image pieces increases step by step (for example, as shown in modification 006SG-2, a plurality of fragments constituting a decorative pattern inside (the part that increases in stages according to the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visual effect of increasing the number of image pieces in stages can strongly impress the player with a specific effect.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine described in form A11,
The specific effect is a effect in which the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed with respect to the display area increases in stages (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the image display device 5 is (a portion where the proportion of the display area of the decorative design in the display area increases step by step),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area increases in stages, thereby making it possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A11 to A14,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
The storage means is capable of storing a plurality of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of displacement image data are stored in the CGROM 206),
The rate at which the specific image is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the display position displacement information is displaced (for example, in the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, the left area 006SG005L, While displacement image data is used to slide the images of the middle area 006SG005C and right area 006SG005R to the third stage, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area Since displacement image data is used for the image of 006SG005R to slide to the first stage or second stage, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displacement mode of the specific image in the specific performance, it is possible to improve the performance interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A11 to A15,
The plurality of pieces of display position displacement information include first display position change information in which the specific image changes from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, super reach Displacement image data for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R to the third stage) and the specific image change from the first aspect to the first aspect. Second display position change information that does not change in two modes (for example, as shown in Figure 14-22, in variable display with normal reach variation pattern, images of left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R are the first stage) or displacement image data for sliding to the second stage),
The first display position change information and the second display position change information include a common changing section in which the image processing means changes the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21 and FIG. 14-22, when using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, In the case of using displacement image data in which the image of the right area 006SG005R slides to the first stage, the parts in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common, When using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. In the case of using displacement image data, the parts in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage are common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first mode to the second mode as the specific effect, it is possible to further improve the effect and interest of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The performance execution means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. (a portion where a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displacement specific image (for example, As shown in 14-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
After displaying the displacement specific image, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(D) and 14-31(E)). After moving the upper region 006SG005T to the right and the lower region 006SG005B to the left, the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is further moved upward and downward, respectively),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, so that the production effect of the specific production can be enhanced, and the production is interesting. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A18 is the gaming machine described in form A17,
The boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is different from at least one display area among the plurality of display areas including the first specific display area and the second specific display area. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(D) and 14-31(E), the upper region 006SG005T moves toward the right side, the lower region 006SG005B moves toward the left side, The boundary between area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B is a portion that moves in the vertical direction),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the synergistic effect of the displacement of the plurality of display areas and the displacement of the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can further enhance the production effect of the specific production.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
At least in the specific display layer, it is possible to arrange an image across an area corresponding to the display area and an area outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. part to be placed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when displaying a displacement specific image in the display area as a specific effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display will be performed in the display area.
In modification 006SG-5 of the present invention, when performing the promotion effect (specific effect), the displacement target image is enlarged so that the left and right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. Although form A is illustrated in which an image for promotion effect is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied in the displacement target image is , it is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of form A20 is the gaming machine described in form A19,
The effect execution means is capable of enlarging an image displayed in the display area during a period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, according to progress of the promotion effect). (a part in which the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged in stages),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display from being performed in the display area during the process up to displaying the displacement specific image while maintaining the production effect of the specific production.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The effect execution means displays the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and displays the specific image in the first specific display area and the second specific display area as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose relative position with respect to the display area is displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , the upper area 006SG005T is displayed moving toward the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is displayed moving toward the left side),
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example, As shown in modification example 006SG-3, the part where the image displayed by the hand in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific performance can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, so it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The effect execution means displays the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and displays the specific image in the first specific display area and the second specific display area as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose relative position with respect to the display area is displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , the upper area 006SG005T is displayed moving toward the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is displayed moving toward the left side),
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a portion of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are (For example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left) (at least a part of which is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to add surprise to a specific performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine described in form A21 or form A22,
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is the first specific display when the displacement specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the pre-read preview effect. A part of the image that is displayed across is not displayed as an image that is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a pre-read preview effect. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve the performance interest of a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A23,
The display means is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, an autostereoscopic image display device 5' is a portion where a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image) can be displayed),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect that displays the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45 (B), a portion where a preview effect during variable display can be displayed as a stereoscopic image),
When executing the specific effect, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45(D), when executing the development suggestion effect, the development (The part where the image displayed as a suggestive effect is displayed as a two-dimensional image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player's interest can be improved by the stereoscopic presentation, and since the displacement specific image is not displayed as the stereoscopic image in the specific presentation, the specific presentation can be carried out suitably.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine described in form A24,
The right-eye image and the left-eye image are arranged in a stereoscopic display layer in which the arranged images are preferentially displayed in the display area than in the specific display layer.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when executing a specific effect, it is possible to suitably perform a stereoscopic effect.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine described in form A24 or form A25,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the stereoscopic performance as an introductory performance of the specific performance in a period before the execution period of the specific performance during variable display.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the stereoscopic presentation, the player can be made aware in advance that the specific presentation will be executed, so that the presentation effect of the specific presentation can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, and the like. In the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives production control commands via the input circuit 260. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5, such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, based on the performance control command. Execute the process to

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the display control unit 123 controls characters (also called image data such as people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, etc., CG data), decorative designs, and backgrounds as image element data used as sprite images. Image, a first reservation memory display area 006SG005D that specifiably displays the first special symbol reservation memory number as game-related information in the main feature section 006SG, and a second reservation memory that specifiably displays the second special symbol reservation memory number. Displayed together with a CGROM 205 in which data such as a first interface image 006SG005I for displaying a display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are stored, and an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the control circuit.

The performance control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to read necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which image data is stored in accordance with the received performance control command. The CGROM 205 stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, image data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background images. This is a ROM for storing. Note that the CGROM 205 in the feature section 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for displacing the positions of pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying it to the displacement target image, which will be described later. There is. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to instructions from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 then executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 includes a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, attributes (parameters used when drawing characters, such as character drawing order, number of colors, scaling ratio, an attribute register 203 that stores data specifying palette numbers, coordinates, etc.; a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images to a drawing area in the VRAM area (described later); A data transfer control unit 211 that controls the transfer, video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) for displaying image data stored in a display image creation area described later in the VRAM area. It is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs a signal and a synchronization signal, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the analog signal to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the production control CPU 120 via a CPU interface 201, and an infrared camera 60 is connected. An image processing DSP 264 is connected. Furthermore, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via a CG bus interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the production control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, data transfer control unit 211, and display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus, and can access the system register 202. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus, and can access the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via a VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system register 202 includes a system control register that stores instructions for initial settings, drawing, data transfer, etc., an interrupt control register that stores instructions for outputting interrupt signals (described later), a drawing area in the VRAM area, and arrangement of palette data. A drawing register that stores an area, a data transfer register that stores a source address, a destination address, etc. during data transfer, a display register that stores a display image creation area in the VRAM area, etc. are allocated.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the production control CPU 120 every time a V blank (image update period) starts, and also outputs various other interrupt signals to the production control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this feature section 006SG, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 14-2(a) and 14-2(b), in this feature section 006SG, an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers. is being generated. The VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer, and images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (synthesized) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image to be displayed is arranged (see FIG. 14-5). Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower layers, and images in higher layers are set to have higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers have higher display priority on the image display device 5. is set low.

As shown in Figures 14-5 (A) and 14-5 (B), the VRAM area has a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, and a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images. A layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the layer 3 image, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the layer 3 image are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image, which will be described later, and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area as a displacement target image, This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to be described later to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area ( A display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

Note that the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) in the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image display An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are the highest in the image display device 5. Each is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low).

In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is the middle layer with lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority. It's a layer.

As shown in FIGS. 14-2(b) and 14-5(B), the layer 1 image drawing area displays the number of reserved first special figures in a manner that allows identification at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first interface image 006SG005I, which includes a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D for displaying the data and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U for specifyably displaying the number of reserved special figures, and in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, This is a drawing area where these images are drawn in order to display the second interface image 006SG005J that includes small patterns whose display area is smaller than the decorative patterns.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 in order to perform variable display of decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this feature section 006SG, images drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), images drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (layer 3 images). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) are set to have the highest display priority, and therefore are the most The image (decoration pattern) that is displayed as an upper layer image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, so the image display device 5 The image (background image) that is displayed as a middle-layer image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as a low-layer image on the image display device 5.

In addition, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area in this feature section 006SG have a transparency of 0% so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the image drawn and arranged in each image drawing area is set higher than 0%, and the image display device 5 An image that is transparently displayed in the display area or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Next, a method for displacing the displacement target image in the feature section 006SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 14-3(A), a plurality of pixels having a red component value (R value) and a green component value (G value) are arranged in the displacement image applied to the displacement target image. These R value and G value each take a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Taking one pixel A among these plurality of pixels as an example, the display control unit 123 moves the image into the displacement target image from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image according to the R value and G value of the pixel A. The position of the pixel X to be displaced is specified from . Specifically, if the R value of pixel A is 1 to 127, the display control unit 123 displays the position moved in the negative direction (left direction) of the X axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. is specified as the coordinate (position) of pixel X in the X-axis direction, and if the R value of pixel A is 129 to 256, move in the positive direction (rightward) of the The position of the pixel X is specified as the coordinate of the pixel X in the X-axis direction. Note that the amount of movement in the X-axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median R value.

In addition, if the G value of pixel A is 1 to 127, the coordinate of pixel If the G value of pixel A is 129 to 256, the position moved in the positive direction (upward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is set in the Y axis direction of pixel X. Specify as the coordinates (position) of Note that the amount of movement in the Y-axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median value of the G values.

After specifying the position of pixel X in the displacement target image, pixel X is designated as a pixel to be displayed at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, pixel X is displaced to a position corresponding to pixel A. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A, it is possible to displace any pixel X to a position corresponding to pixel A, and also By adjusting the values to be the same, it is also possible to displace a specific pixel X, which is the same amount away from the position corresponding to pixel A, to the position corresponding to pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for a plurality of pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-3(B), the displacement image is divided into multiple regions with different R values and G values (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement image The displacement image is generated by applying each region to the displacement target image.

For example, as shown in Figures 14-4(A) to 14-4(C), the R value is 128 and the G value is any one of 1 to 127 as the area composing the displacement image. A certain displacement image a has an R value of 128 and a G value of 1 between 129 and 256. A displacement image b has an R value of 1 between 1 and 127 and a G value of 128. A certain displacement image c and a displacement image d having an R value of 1 from 129 to 256 and a G value of 128 are provided, and a triple circle image is set as a displacement target image.

In this case, as shown in Figure 14-4 (D), for the displacement image a, the range moved downward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image a in the displacement target image is converted into a displacement image. Specify the display range. In addition, as shown in Figure 14-4 (E), regarding the displacement image b, in the displacement target image, the range moved upward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image b is displayed in the displacement image. Specify a range. In addition, as shown in Figure 14-4 (F), regarding the displacement image c, in the displacement image, the range moved to the left by the difference in R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image c is Specify the display range. In addition, as shown in Figure 14-4 (G), regarding the displacement image d, in the displacement image, the position moved to the right by the difference in R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image d is Specify the display range.

As described above, the range specified from the displacement target image by the R value and G value of displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d is defined as displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image By displacing the image c and the displacement image d, a displacement image as shown in FIG. 14-4(H) is generated.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, by setting either the R value or the G value of the displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d to a fixed value, these displacement images a, Although the boundaries of displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d are clearly demarcated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, these displacement image a, displacement image b, and displacement image It is also possible to generate a gradation-like image as a displacement image by gradually varying the R value and G value of pixels near each boundary of the image c and the displacement image d.

FIG. 14-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 006SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 14-6(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 14-6 (B), determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot" (predetermined result). ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-6(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 14-6(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 14-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 14-7, in this feature section 006SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 14-8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 006SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic section 006SG, the special figure display results are determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 006SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 006SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 006SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

FIG. 14-9(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 006SG selects one of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 006SG using FIG. 14-9(B), in this feature section 006SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state changes from the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive winning situation, which occurs continuously without any intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 006SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 14-9 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 14-10 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 006SG. In this characteristic part 006SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although this characteristic part 006SG provides one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this feature part 006SG, two types of variation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two types of super reach variation patterns are provided. More than one type or only one type may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 006SG is a variation pattern of super reach α, a variation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2), a variation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-2), and a variation pattern of super reach β. As the fluctuation patterns, there are provided a fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot and a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14-10, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 006SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In particular, the special figure variation time of the super reach β variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach α variation pattern. In other words, the super reach β variation pattern is set so that the expectation level of a jackpot where the variable display result is a “jackpot” is higher than the super reach α variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Note that the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in this feature section 006 are displayed during variable display. It is also a variation pattern that executes a performance that suggests the development of a super reach performance after a reach is established. In the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed without developing into the super reach reach effect after the development suggestion effect is executed, while the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2 , PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the reach effect of super reach is executed after the execution of the development suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are displayed during variable display. , exemplifies a form in which a development suggestion performance to a super reach reach performance is executed after a reach is established, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern are different from each other. A variation pattern may be provided in which the development suggestion effect is not executed. Note that when the development suggestion performance is executed, the rate of development to the super reach reach performance may be set higher than when the development suggestion performance is not executed.

FIG. 14-11 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 006SG. In this feature section 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach α jackpot variation pattern), and PB1-3 (Super reach β jackpot variation pattern).

Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. The present invention is not limited to the above, but includes a plurality of jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables with different determination ratios among PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and different jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables depending on the jackpot type. may be used to determine the variation pattern. By doing this, it is possible to create a variable pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern the variable display result is a jackpot, You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α out), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with out of super reach α), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. Determined from (Variation pattern for shortening time saving when non-reach is off), PA2-1 (Variation pattern when normal reach is off), PA2-2 (Variation pattern when super reach α is off), and PA2-3 (Variation pattern when super reach β is off) do.

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 006SG is "off", the special figure is Since the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It includes a setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). Based on this, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). Based on this, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure reservation storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-1 is provided with, for example, a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area shown in FIGS. 14-15(A) includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values for each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 006SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section. The reception command buffer at the time of starting a winning is a storage area (corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the first special figure reserved memory. A storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed is provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special figure reserved memory. (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") and a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command) and a pending storage number notification command ( The first pending memory number notification command or the second pending memory number notification command) are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning are associated with these starting opening winning designation command and pending memory number notification command, Storage areas (entries) are secured for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

FIG. 14-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 006SGS148), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set the table. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006 SGS150a). In addition, in this step 006SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high accuracy, low accuracy). , In the process of step 006 SGS150a, the special figure display result is determined using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display of the special figure game etc. is started is a high certainty state or not. By determining whether or not to be considered a "jackpot", when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type is determined to be one of the plurality of types depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of ``A'', ``Probable variable jackpot B'', and ``Probable variable jackpot C'' matches (Step 006 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006 SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After step 006SGS155 ends, or if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; N), it is determined whether to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not). A fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of (2) and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 006SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 14-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS164).

In the determination at step 006SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 006SGS161; N), the gaming state is changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section. It is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed in which time saving control is performed in the state or time saving state (step 006 SGS168). If the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not turned on (step 006SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the pending storage number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section By reading, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the number of pending memories of the identified variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 006 SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variation patterns. Select and set (step 006SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172). ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern as one of multiple types. (Step 006SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. As the table to be used for determining the deviation pattern, the error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 006SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer etc. Based on the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special hit fluctuation pattern determination table, or loss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D, one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns can be selected. (Step 006SGS175).

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of step 006SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 006SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 006SGS175, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 006 SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 006SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 006SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting section. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command are sent in sequence. It turns out. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be changed arbitrarily, for example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, and the variable pattern are sent. The designation command, the game state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 14-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 006SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 006SGS184). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), win start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 006 SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. If the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 006 SGS190; N), that is, if the number of time saving times remains and the high base state is reached, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 006SGS190;N). 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (Step 006SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the variable probability flag or the time-saving flag is cleared. After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, the low probability/low base state) (step 006SGS195), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

14-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 006 SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006 SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variable flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), and the time saving number counter is set to "0". After setting (step 006SGS209), the process advances to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 006 SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 006 SGS216).

Next, the operation of the production control CPU 120 will be explained. 14-16 is a part of the flowchart of the production control process shown in FIG. 13. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 performs a background image change process (step 006SG162) for changing the background image displayed on the image display device 5 after executing the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) described above. ), and any one of steps S170 to S175 is executed.

As the background image change process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 changes the image display at the start timing of variable display (timing when the performance control process process is executed with the value of the performance control process flag set to 1). It is sufficient to decide to change the background image displayed on the device 5 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%), and start displaying a new background image on the image display device 5 in accordance with the determination. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, when any one of a plurality of background images is displayed on the image display device 5, a variable display of the decorative pattern and an effect corresponding to the variable display are executed. There is.

In addition, in the background image change process, the production control CPU 120 changes when the gaming state changes (for example, from the normal state to the jackpot gaming state, from the jackpot gaming state to the probability change state or time saving state, from the probability change state or time saving state to the jackpot state or normal When the state changes), the image display device 5 may be able to display a background image corresponding to the game state to which the change is made.

FIG. 14-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the variable display performance process of the performance control process process. In the variable display production process, the production control CPU 120 uses a process timer according to the process table selected by the production control CPU 120 in accordance with the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process; Each value of the set variable display time timer and variable display control timer is decreased by 1 (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control state for the presentation device (performance component) is changed based on the contents of the next set process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation part control data, etc.) (Step 006SGS909). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production control of the parts) is executed (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921; Y), the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display the next display screen of the decorative pattern at the center left (display switching of the previous decorative pattern). Image data for the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the point in time is created (step 006SGS922). In addition, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923; N), proceed to step 006SGS927; if the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), proceed to step 006SGS927. Furthermore, it is determined whether a display image processing flag, which will be described later, is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926; if the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), check the contents of the process data being executed. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to reach effect (Step 006SGS925). If it is not the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to the reach effect (Step 006SGS925; N), proceed to Step 006SGS927, and if it is the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to the reach effect (Step 006SGS925; Y), proceed to Step 006SGS926. move on.

As step 006SGS926, the performance control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process for processing (displacing) a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to execute a process of compositing (superimposing) the images created in the above-described steps 006SGS922 and 006SGS921 on the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs to the image display device 5 a signal based on an image obtained by superimposing an image such as a set background image and an image based on display control execution data set in the process table. In this manner, the background image, character image, decorative pattern, etc. in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 14-19, the image displayed within the display area of the image display device 5 in this feature section 006SG includes a part of the background image and a position that has been pre-positioned so that it will be displayed within the display area. are the adjusted first interface image 006SG005I, second interface image 006SG005J, and decorative pattern. In particular, the background image in this feature section 006SG is drawn as an image that is longer in the horizontal and vertical width directions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 is The center portion of the image in the left and right width direction is displayed. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the background image, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area are larger in vertical width and horizontal width than the display area of the image display device 5. This is an area for drawing and arranging a long image, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays only a portion of the image that corresponds to the display area.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, an image whose vertical width dimension and horizontal width dimension are longer than the display area of the image display device 5 is drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, displacement image creation area, and display image creation area. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area are set to have a vertical width smaller than the display area of the image display device 5. While the display image creation area is used as an area for drawing and arranging images with long dimensions and horizontal width dimensions, the display image creation area is an image whose vertical width dimensions and left and right width dimensions are the same as the display area of the image display device 5. It may also be an image that is drawn and placed. In this case, out of the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area, only the part corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5 is placed in the display image creation area. The background image may be displayed in the display area of the display device 5.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is on (step 006 SGS930; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, once a pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will stop the fluctuation, so for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing display image processing processing (step 006SGS926) during the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 14-17. In the display image processing process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS941). If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it is determined whether the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS942). If the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach (step 006SGS942; Y), image data for displacement for successful development to super reach performance (for notification of execution of super reach performance) is selected. The process then proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

Note that the image data for displacement in this feature section 006SG includes the displacement target image (in the case of this feature section 006SG, an image obtained by superimposing an image placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image placed in the layer 3 image drawing area). This is data in which displacement images to be applied to (images placed in the displacement image creation area) are arranged in chronological order.

In addition, when the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS942; N), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 for failure to develop to the super reach performance (for notification of non-execution of the super reach performance). It is determined at a predetermined ratio which one of the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure A and the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure B to be selected as the displacement image data (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A may be determined at a rate of 50%, and the selection of displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B may be determined at a rate of 50%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, two displacement image data, A for failure to develop super reach performance and displacement image data for B for failure to develop super reach performance, are used as displacement image data for failure to develop to super reach performance. Although a form in which displacement image data can be selected is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are three types of displacement image data that can be selected as displacement image data for failure to develop to super reach performance. There may be more than one.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure A has been determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). If it is determined in step 006SGS944 that the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A has been selected (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS946), if it has been decided to select the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B (step 006SGS945; N), select the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B and step 006SGS948 (Step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, the first displacement image is selected from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS951.

Further, if the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step 006SGS941; Y). 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the effect control CPU 120 executes displacement image drawing processing. In the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120, for example, draws an image placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image placed in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 14-5 in the displacement image creation area. A process of creating a displacement image by creating a displacement target image by combining (superimposing) and applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image may be executed.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image is determined by, for example, whether the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data. do it.

If the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off to end the display image processing process (step 006SGS953), and the displacement image drawing process ends. If the displacement image created in is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is ended without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in variable display of decorative patterns in the feature section 006SG will be described based on FIGS. 14-20 to 14-23. First, as shown in FIGS. 14-20(A) and 14-20(B), in this feature section 006SG, the display mode of the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the gaming state. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), a character image and a numerical image are combined as decorative symbols for the normal state. A decorative pattern is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-20(B), when the gaming state is a time-saving state (low-accuracy low base state or high-accuracy high base state), a time-saving state decoration with only numeric images is used as a decorative pattern. The pattern will be displayed.

In the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 14-21 (A) and 14-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging depending on the combination of reach. After that, the inner decorative pattern with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 14-21(C), the development suggestion effect is such that the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L that includes the left decorative pattern. , a middle area 006SG005C including the inner decorative pattern, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image included in the middle area 006SG005C) is gradually changed. A development notification pattern that notifies you that a super reach effect will develop from above by sliding downward (written as "Development!" as shown in Figures 14-21 (C) to 14-21 (E)) 2) is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

Incidentally, the development notification symbol in the feature section 006SG is a symbol that is displayed only when the development suggestion performance is executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other performances during variable display.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R ( The decorative pattern and background image on the right slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in Figure 14-21 (C) and the second step shown in Figure 14-21 (D). The number increases as the number of stages progresses through the third stage shown in Figure 14-21(E).

When the third stage of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is completed, the image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 (the center of the middle area 006SG005C). The movement of the development notification symbol is completed and the development of super reach to reach effect is announced.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 14-22 (A) and 14-22 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging depending on the combination of reach. After that, the inner decorative pattern with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 14-22(C), the development suggestion effect is such that the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L that includes the left decorative pattern. , a middle area 006SG005C including the inner decorative pattern, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figures 14-22(C) to 14-22(E), the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image included in the middle area 006SG005C) is gradually changed. By sliding downward, a development notification pattern is displayed moving toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that the super reach performance will develop from above.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R ( The decorative pattern and background image on the right slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in Figure 14-22 (C) and the second step shown in Figure 14-22 (D). It will increase as you progress through the stages.

However, in the normal reach variable display, after the first slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is executed, or the second step slide movement is After execution, as shown in FIG. 14-22(E), the development suggestion effect ends without executing the third slide movement, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes to the image shown in FIG. The state returns to the state shown in -22(B), and the decorative pattern and small pattern stop at a combination indicating a miss.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), in this feature section 006SG, the amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R exemplifies a form in which the number increases as the stage progresses; however, the present invention is not limited to this. The amount of movement may decrease as the stages progress, or the amount of movement may increase or decrease only in any of the first to third stages.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as an example of a development suggestion effect, each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is exemplified as being able to be moved and displayed up to three levels. However, the number of steps in which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is slid as a development suggestion effect may be two or less or four or more.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), in this feature section 006SG, the sliding direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R is displayed in the middle area 006SG005C. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the sliding direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R is the middle area 006SG005C. It may be in the same direction as the image displayed on the screen.

Further, in the present feature section 006SG, an example is given in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced regarding the development suggestion performance when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), but the present invention The image displayed on the image display device 5 may also be displaced for the development suggestion performance when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state). .

In addition, as a development suggestion effect in this feature section 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 (A) to 14-23 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved storage display area. A first interface image 006SG005I including 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and a decorative pattern including the development notification pattern described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the 3-image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is A displacement image is created by applying the displacement image to the image.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed to display a display on the image display device 5. The image is now created.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-22, the first interface image 006SG005I and The second interface image 006SG005J is an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and therefore is not subject to displacement. For this reason, the visibility from the player is reduced by moving the decorative pattern upward or downward in the display area of the image display device 5 as a development suggestion effect, while the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display of the second interface image 006SG005J at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 is maintained at the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is reduced. There isn't.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display using the super reach variation pattern, the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage. On the other hand, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the displacement image data for the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is used to slide to the first or second stage. Image data is used. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display in the super reach variation pattern is set to have a higher proportion of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, so in this feature section 006SG, the development The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled differs depending on the displacement image data used in the suggestion performance.

In addition, in the development suggestion production of this feature section 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains the left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains the middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains the right decorative pattern, and these left, middle, and right The decorative patterns, including characters and numbers, slide and move without being separated, so it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest of the development suggestion performance due to the separation of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. ing.

Note that in this feature section 006SG, an example is shown in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this. , only one or two of the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 006SG, image data for displaying decorative patterns and background images, and displacement image data for displacing the display positions of these decorative patterns and background images. Specific effects that change the display position of these decorative patterns and background images just by using them (development suggestion effect in characteristic part 006SG, reach suggestion effect in modification example 006SG-1, revival effect in modification example 006SG-2, modification example 006SG- 3, promotion performance in modification 006SG-5, temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification performance in modification 006SG-6), these specific performances can be executed using dedicated data. The amount of data stored in the CGROM 205 can be reduced compared to the case where the data is stored in the CGROM 205.

In particular, in this feature section 006SG, since it is possible to display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, originally it would be possible to produce a specific effect depending on whether each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. The pattern must be stored in the CGROM 205 in advance, but in this feature section 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced by simply using the displacement image data, so the pattern is stored in the CGROM 205. The amount of data can be reduced. In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as game related information, a first reservation storage display area 006SG005D that can specify the number of first reserved special symbols stored and a second reservation storage display area 006SG005U that can specify the number of second reserved special symbols stored. , and small symbols whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game-related information includes information such as information indicating that the game state is time-saving. A fourth device that can specify that a firing promotion display or a variable display that prompts the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big prize opening or the gate 41 is in progress based on the state or probability change state. A pattern or the like may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority, that is, the main feature part 006SG Since this is a non-target image for image displacement in the development suggestion performance, the display position will not shift with the image of the left area 006SG005L, the image of the right area 006SG005R, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C, which are the displacement targets, and the development suggestion. It is possible to prevent game-related information such as the number of stored special symbols and the variable display of small symbols from becoming difficult for players to visually recognize when performing performances.

Further, among the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlappingly with the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion performance. Since the display position of the second interface image 006SG005J itself does not change, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the second interface image 006SG005J without any discomfort. On the other hand, since the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance, the player can A first method that accurately displays the number of stored first special symbols in the first interface image 006SG005I in a specifiable manner without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of each image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. It is possible to recognize the pending memory display area 006SG005D and the second pending memory display area 006SG005U that specifiably displays the number of second special symbol pending memories.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is placed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. By moving upward or downward from the section, the visibility is reduced, which improves the performance effect of the development suggestion performance. Furthermore, the small designs are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion performance is executed, unlike decorative designs, they do not move from the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, so visibility does not decrease. The player can easily understand the progress of the game by visually recognizing the small symbols even during execution of the development suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-21, the development suggestion effect of this feature section 006SG is such that the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R increases in stages. , while improving the performance effect of the development suggestion performance, it is possible to emphasize the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R at each stage, further improving the performance effect. can.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage. While displacement image data is used, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the displacement image is used to slide the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R to the first or second stage. data is used, and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion production. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of moving stages of the image, and it is possible to improve the performance interest of the development suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, when using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the left area 006SG005L, the middle area When using displacement image data in which the images of area 006SG005C and right area 006SG005R slide to the first step, the parts where the images of left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the first step are common. When using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R move to the second stage. In the case of using displacement image data that slides, the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R have the same part that slides to the second stage, so the left area 006SG005L is used as a development suggestion effect. , the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can draw the player's attention to the process such as the number of steps in which the images slide, so that the entertainment of the development suggestion performance can be further improved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 14-24 and 14-25 as modification 006SG-1, it is suggested that the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is a reach during variable display. It may also be possible to perform a reach suggestion effect.

The production mode of the reach suggestion production will be explained based on FIGS. 14-24 and 14-25. First, in the variable display with the normal reach or super reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 14-24(A) to 14-24(C), the left ornament is displayed at the timing immediately before the left ornament stops. An effect image such as a character acts on the pattern, and the left decorative pattern stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the left decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-24(D) to 14-24(F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern at the timing immediately before the right decorative pattern stops, and the right decorative pattern The decorative pattern stops and becomes a reach. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the right decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 14-25(A) to 14-25(C), the left decorative symbol is displayed at the timing immediately before the left decorative symbol stops. An effect image such as a character acts on the image, and the left decorative pattern stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the left decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-25(D) to 14-25(F), an effect image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern at the timing immediately before the right decorative pattern stops. A number of symbols that do not match the reach combination stop as decorative symbols. At this time, the decorative pattern on the right stops and becomes a reach. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the right decorative pattern is displayed without distortion.

In addition, as for the reach suggestion effect in this modified example 006SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 14-26(A) to 14-26(F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area is A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image drawing area is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn on. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-1, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is A displacement image is created by applying the displacement image to the image.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, a form in which reach suggestion performance can be executed in variable display of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach suggestion performance may not be executed in part of the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, a form in which action images such as characters act on the left and right decorative patterns is exemplified as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. As the reach suggestion performance in the variable display of the reach variation pattern, a case may be provided in which the effect image acts on the decorative pattern only once (acts only on the left decorative pattern).

Furthermore, in this modification example 006SG-1, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on a decorative pattern as a reach suggestion effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple reach suggestion effects may be used. The effect image may be displayed, and the proportion of the reach may be changed depending on which effect image acts on the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-1, in the case where a reach is not achieved even though an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the effect image or the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern Although a form in which a part of the image is not distorted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the effect image must be used regardless of whether or not it becomes a reach. A part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect is applied may be distorted.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, a part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect image acts is distorted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect image acts. Only one of the parts of the background image may be distorted.

Further, in the feature section 213SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28 as modification 006SG-2, the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is to use a decorative pattern that is once stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination. It may also be possible to perform a revival performance in which the characters change into a jackpot combination.

The performance mode of the revival performance will be explained based on FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28. First, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Figure 14-27 (A), after the variable display result is suggested to be a hit as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative symbol is a hit. Wrong combinations are displayed oscillatingly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the inner decoration pattern, and a plurality of inner decoration patterns are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. appears divided into pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-27(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are displayed in an enlarged manner from the state shown in FIG. 14-27(B) as the second stage crack, and each fragment is displayed as an image. They move in different directions from the center of the device 5 so as to spread out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-27(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged from the state shown in FIG. 14-27(C) as the third stage crack, and each fragment is further enlarged. Move to spread.

Then, as a crack in the fourth stage, an image of fragments of the decorative pattern inside scattering is finally displayed, and then a new decorative pattern is displayed as the decorative pattern inside, indicating that it is a jackpot. Variable display stops.

On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is a loss, as shown in Figure 14-28 (A), after the variable display result is suggested to be a loss as a reach effect for normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern is displayed. The reach is displayed oscillatingly depending on the combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the inner decoration pattern, and a plurality of inner decoration patterns are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. appears divided into pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-28(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are displayed in an enlarged manner from the state shown in FIG. 14-28(B) as the second stage crack, and each fragment is displayed as an image. They move in different directions from the center of the device 5 so as to spread out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-28(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 14-28(C), and each fragment is further enlarged. Move to spread.

However, in a variable display in which the variable display result is incorrect, after the first stage cracking is performed, after the second stage cracking is performed, or after the third stage cracking is performed, The revival effect ends without the fourth stage cracking being executed, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. 14-28(A), and the decorative pattern and small pattern are removed. Stop at the combination shown.

In addition, as a revival effect in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 14-29(A) to 14-29(F), the first reserved memory display is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area. A first interface image 006SG005I including area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a crack effect image 006SG005H is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-2, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image rendering area, and a displacement image (middle image) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image. An image in which the decorative pattern is divided into multiple pieces and each piece is displayed as if it were spread out is created.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 4 A display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

In particular, in this modification 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside expands step by step as a revival effect. In other words, in the resurrection effect, the proportion of the display area of the decorative pattern inside the display area of the image display device 5 Since the number increases in stages, it is possible to more effectively draw the attention of the player to the revival performance by expanding the decorative symbols therein in stages.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, a mode is illustrated in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the decorative pattern inside as a revival effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect image A plurality of display modes of 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 14-30, blue and red are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, and when the variable display result is a jackpot, the blue crack is displayed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival performance is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H will be displayed when the revival effect is executed at a rate of 80%, and the red crack effect will be displayed when the resurrection effect is executed at a 20% rate. The image 006SG005H may be displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H are Three or more colors may be provided.

In addition, in the present modification 006SG-2, a mode is exemplified in which a revival effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the revival performance may be executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in Figure 14-28, the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments in the resurrection performance, and the number of these fragments is maintained as the resurrection performance progresses. , an example is given in which the fragments are moved in stages from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns in these The plurality of constituent fragments may be increased in stages as the revival performance progresses. By doing this, the resurrection performance can strongly impress the player with the visual effect that the number of fragments forming the inner decoration pattern increases as the resurrection performance progresses.

Furthermore, in the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 14-31 as modification 006SG-3, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a variable display is executed in a super reach variation pattern in the reserved memory. A look-ahead preview performance may be performed that suggests from a plurality of previous variable displays that a variable display in which the variable display result is a jackpot will be executed.

The appearance of the look-ahead preview effect will be explained based on FIG. 14-31. First, in a state where a plurality of pending memories exist, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(A) and 14-31(B), the variable display being executed stops when the combination of decorative symbols is out of order. Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(C) and 14-31(D), when the next variable display starts, a cutting effect that crosses the display area left and right in the display area of the image display device 5 is created. Image 006SG005S is displayed overlappingly with the decorative pattern and background image. Among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a lower lower area 006SG005B including the decorative pattern and a part of the background image, and the remaining area with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as the border. It is divided into an upper region 006SG005T containing a decorative pattern and a background image. In other words, the boundary between the lower region 006SG005B and the upper upper region 006SG005T is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(D) to 14-31(E), the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. Slide at the same time. The lower area 006SG005B, which has slid to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides downward, and the upper area 006SG005T, which has slid to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides upward. . At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is moved and displayed on both the boundary on the lower region 006SG005B side and the boundary on the upper region 006SG005T side so as to follow.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(E) and 14-31(F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the lower area 006SG005B slides downward and the upper area 006SG005T slides upward. The display of a black image starts. The display area of the black image expands as the lower area 006SG005B slides downward and the upper area 006SG005T slides upward, and the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T move outside the display area. By completing the movement, the display area enters a so-called blackout state in which only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed.

Thereafter, when the blackout ends, display of a new background image and decorative pattern is started in the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that this pre-read preview performance is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the external pre-read target starts.

In addition, as for the pre-read preview effect in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-3 includes a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images in a lower layer than the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing images in a lower layer. It is located. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image including the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is created.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area, and the layer 5 A display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

As described above, in this modified example 006SG-3, in the pre-read preview performance as a specific performance in the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(C) and 14-31(D), The decorative pattern and the background image are displayed across the area 006SG005B, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left, and the border between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B moves. Since the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed, it is possible to more effectively make the player recognize the left and right movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B as the pre-read preview effect, and increase the interest in the game. can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern or background image, so the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area Since the display position of the cutting effect image 006SG005S does not change even if the display position with the area 006SG005B changes, the display position of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B can be changed by comparing the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B with the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The displacement can be made more conspicuous, and the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(D) and 14-31(E), after moving the upper region 006SG005T toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B toward the left side, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region By moving the boundary portions with 006SG005B upward and downward, respectively, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect of the preview preview performance and improve the interest of the performance. In particular, as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in Figures 14-31(D) and 14-31(E), the upper area 006SG005T moves towards the right side, the lower area 006SG005B moves towards the left side, but the upper area 006SG005T moves towards the left side. Since the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary can further enhance the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance. Can be done.

In this modification 006SG-3, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is a vertical direction that is different from the right side, which is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same as the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T and the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. It is sufficient if it is different from either one of them.

In this modification 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a pre-read preview effect, and the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are moved and displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, a plurality of display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S are provided, and a variable display of the pre-read target is provided depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, three types of display colors, blue, green, and red, are provided as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and when the variable display result of the prefetch target is a jackpot, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. It is displayed in blue at a rate of 10%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the prefetch target is incorrect, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue at a rate of 60%, green at a rate of 30%, and red at a rate of 10%. Bye.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S displayed during the pre-reading preview performance, so that the performance effect of the pre-reading preview performance can be further enhanced.

In this modified example 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is provided with three types of display colors, blue, green, and red. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cutting effect image 006SG005S The display colors of the image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. Furthermore, the ratio at which the variable display result of the prefetch target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) may be varied depending on aspects other than color, such as the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the number of displayed cutting effect images 006SG005S, etc. .

Further, in the present modification example 006SG-3, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is divided into two areas along the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a pre-read preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas as a pre-read preview effect. In this case, the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance may be improved by varying the direction in which each area slides.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, a form in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved respectively is exemplified as a pre-read preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-read preview effect The region to be moved may be only one of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the left side The image is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different, so the pre-read preview effect is This can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left At least a portion may be common to the image. By doing so, it is possible to add surprise to the pre-read preview performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification example 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(C) and 14-31(D), the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5 is The image displayed across 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is the same as the image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left as a pre-read preview effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at a timing before the execution of the pre-read preview effect. A part of the image may not be displayed as an image that is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a pre-read preview effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance interest of the pre-read preview performance.

In this modified example 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a preview effect (in FIG. 14-31(D), the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the right side). When the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the left and the lower region 006SG005B is moved upward and the lower region 006SG005B is moved downward in FIG. It is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a preview effect, the amount of movement (displacement amount ) may be different. In this way, by varying the amount of movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, which move in opposite directions as a pre-read preview effect, the performance effect of the pre-read preview effect can be further improved.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the proportion of the variable display result of the prefetch target being a jackpot is varied depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention However, the display color of the cut effect image 006SG005S may be changeable each time variable display is performed, as shown in FIG. 14-34 as a modification 006SG-4. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the prefetch target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) may vary depending on the display color of the final cutting effect image 006SG005S or the display color change pattern.

Furthermore, in the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 14-35 as Modified Example 006SG-5, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, during the variable display, once there is a non-probable variable jackpot or a 2-round definite variable with a small number of rounds. A combination of decorative patterns in which decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates the type of jackpot, such as a jackpot, and then the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot, and then they finally stop. You may perform a promotion performance (also referred to as a re-lottery performance) that notifies you of the jackpot type.

The performance mode of the promotion performance will be explained based on FIG. 14-35. First, after announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot as a normal reach or super reach reach effect, as shown in Figure 14-35 (A), after these reach effects are finished, the decorative symbols are displayed as a non-probable variable jackpot or a 2-round guaranteed variable. A combination indicating a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot (in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(A), a combination of even numbers "2" indicating a variable jackpot) is displayed.

Then, as shown in Figure 14-35 (B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are displayed as promotion effects such as a 2-round probability-variable jackpot, a 5-round probability-variable jackpot, a 10-round probability-variable jackpot, etc. The combinations of decorative symbols of other jackpot types are variably displayed at a constant speed.

During execution of the promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-35(C) and 14-35(D), the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is directed leftward in two steps. It gets distorted.

Then, the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot type indicated by the initially displayed combination of decorative symbols (see Figure 14-35 (A)). In some cases, after the first or second stage distortion of the promotion performance, the decorative pattern stops at the combination of the corresponding jackpot type (in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(E), the combination of probability-variable jackpot). On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the initially displayed combination of decorative symbols, the decorative symbol will be displayed after the first stage of distortion of the promotion effect. It stops at a combination of jackpot types (in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(F), a non-probable jackpot combination).

In addition, the "advantage for the player" between the jackpot types in this modification 006SG-5 refers to whether or not the game is controlled to a variable probability state after the jackpot game ends, or whether it is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends. Refers to games with a different number of variable displays and games with a different number of rounds in a jackpot game.

As for the promotion effect in this modified example 006SG-5, as shown in FIGS. 14-36(A) to 14-36(E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has the first reserved memory display. A first interface image 006SG005I including area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The background image is drawn.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image is created in which the center portion in the vertical direction is distorted toward the left side.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image is now created.

Note that the display image displayed on the image display device 5 in this modified example 006SG-5 is an image that is longer than the display area of the image display device 5 in the left-right width direction and the top-bottom width direction, as in the characteristic portion 006SG. (See FIGS. 14-19). However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 14-37, the horizontal width dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is It may be the same as the dimension in the left and right width direction of the display area of the display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in FIGS. When the central portion is distorted to the left, an image non-display area where no image is displayed is formed on the right side of the display area.

Therefore, in the case where the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. As shown in Figures 14-39 (A) to 14-39 (D), when performing promotion effects, decorative patterns drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and decorative patterns drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are By enlarging the placed background image or enlarging the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area, a part of the background image can be moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. Deploy. In this way, by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, even if the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted to the left as a promotion effect, the right side of the image display device 5 As a result of being enlarged, a background image placed outside the display area of the image display device 5 will be displayed, which may cause inappropriate image display on the image display device 5, such as the formation of the above-mentioned image non-display area. It is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display will occur.

In addition, in FIG. 14-39, when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted to the left as a promotion effect, an image non-display area where no image is displayed on the right side of the display area is shown. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged in order to prevent the formation of image non-display areas, the present invention is not limited to this. In order to prevent this, only the background image may be enlarged.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when performing the promotion effect, the displacement image is applied to the entire displacement target image enlarged so that the left and right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which an image for promotion effect is created by applying the image, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the area, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-5, the promotion effect is executed when the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display area of the image display device 5. When doing so, an image non-display area is formed during execution of the promotion effect by enlarging the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The enlargement of the background image may be performed in stages according to the progress of the promotion effect (according to an increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by the sudden enlarged display of decorative patterns and background images on the image display device 5. Therefore, while maintaining the promotion effect, the display area of the image display device 5 can be reduced. In the process of increasing the distortion of the displayed image, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display such as display of an image non-display area on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, a form is exemplified in which a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of the super reach reach effect can be executed during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance including temporary stoppage and re-variable display of decorative symbols, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) may be varied depending on the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance. .

In particular, in a variable display that executes such a pseudo-continuous effect, there is a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop immediately before the temporary stop timing of the decorative pattern, or a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. It may also be possible to perform a temporary stop notification effect to notify temporary stop of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in the present modification example 006SG-5, when executing the promotion effect, by enlarging the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5, the display image can also be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image non-display area is prevented from being formed during execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is previously promoted in the CGROM 205. Store an image that is larger in size than the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modification 006SG-5, at least the left and right width dimensions are longer than the left and right width dimensions of the display area of the image display device 5) as an image for presentation. Then, by drawing and arranging the image in the displacement image creation area or the display image creation area, it may be possible to prevent the image non-display portion from being formed during execution of the promotion effect.

Furthermore, in this modified example 006SG-5, when executing the promotion effect, by enlarging the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5, the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image non-display area is prevented from being formed during execution of promotion effect by arranging a part of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, in the display image creation area, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 at a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modification 006SG-5, on the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5). An image (non-display image) different from the displayed image (display image) may be placed adjacent to the displayed image. By doing so, when the promotion effect is executed, the display image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other across the display area and non-display area of the image display device 5, so that the image is replaced with the non-display area. A part of the hidden image will be displayed.

In the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 14-40 to 14-42 as modified example 006SG-6, these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects are used as effects to displace the image displayed on the image display device 5. May be executed.

The performance mode of the temporary stop suggestion performance will be explained based on FIG. 14-40. First, as shown in FIG. 14-40(A), when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swinging stops) and become a reach. Thereafter, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, a pseudo-continuous pattern (a pattern displayed as "NEXT"), which is a part of the decorative pattern, moves from the top to the bottom. At this time, on the image display device 5, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed so as to converge from the periphery of the display area toward the center of the display area, and the images surrounding the ripple effect image 006SG005P ( The left and right decorative patterns and background images are displayed distorted.

If the variable display is a variable display that performs a pseudo-continuous performance (a variable display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 14-40 (B), the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop and , a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that does not perform a pseudo-continuous effect (a variable display in which the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop), as shown in Figure 14-40 (C), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as it is. It moves to the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 and disappears from display, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is a failure is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In addition, in this modification example 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 14-40, by displaying the ripple effect image 006SG005P on the image display device 5, a form that suggests that the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped is provided. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the ripple effect image 006SG005P are provided, and it is determined in which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-association suggestion effect. Accordingly, the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) temporarily stops may be varied.

For example, in FIG. 14-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (double display) as a pseudo-association suggestion effect, but as shown in FIG. 14-41, ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed as a pseudo-association suggestion effect. It is sufficient to provide a case where only one is displayed, and to vary the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) temporarily stops depending on the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo continuous effect.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-6, the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed as a part of the decorative pattern, that is, the pseudo continuous pattern is a pattern that is displayed as part of the variable display even in periods other than the pseudo continuous performance. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the pseudo-continuous pattern may be a pattern different from the decorative pattern, and may be a special pattern that is displayed only during the pseudo-continuous performance.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-42 (A) and 14-42 (B), the temporary stop notification effect is such that after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed. The ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed so as to be diffused from the center of the display area to the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5, and images around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (left and right decorative patterns and background images) are distorted. Is displayed.

The temporary stop suggestion effect and temporary stop notification effect in this modified example 006SG-6 are as shown in Figures 14-43 (A) to 14-43 (F), in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area. , a first interface image 006SG005I including a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and a ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. A decorative pattern including a pseudo continuous pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-6. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image rendering area, and a displacement image (ripples) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image. A distorted decorative pattern and background image) are created using the effect image 006SG005P.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In addition, in the feature section 006GS, a mode in which the effect image is displayed using the image display device 5 capable of displaying only a two-dimensional image has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification 006SG- As shown in FIG. 14-44 and FIG. 14-45 as 7, the effect image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying a stereoscopic image.

Modified example 006SG-7 will be explained below. Note that in the above-described characteristic part 006SG and the modified examples, the image display device 5 is a display device such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) capable of displaying a two-dimensional image (2D image). However, in this modified example 006SG-7, as shown in FIG. 14-44, an autostereoscopic image display device 5 that allows a player to view a stereoscopic image with the naked eye by a parallax barrier method is used. The feature is that by using ', stereoscopic images (3D images) can be displayed in addition to monoscopic images (2D images) as various images.

As shown in FIG. 14-44, the autostereoscopic image display device 5' of this modified example 006SG-7 is a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image). an image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying images, a backlight 006SG901 that emits planar light from the back to the front of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and an image liquid crystal panel on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900. 006SG900 and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 provided at a predetermined interval.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 allows the player's left eye to visually recognize the right eye image (R image) displayed in a vertical strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the left eye image (L image) to be viewed by the player's right eye. The player has a vertically striped black part that acts as a shutter to prevent the player from viewing the image, and a transparent part that allows the right eye image to be seen by the player's right eye and the left eye image to be seen by the player's left eye. A relatively highly optically transparent liquid crystal capable of displaying a parallax barrier image in a parallax barrier image display state and a transmissive display state in which all pixels are transparent without vertical striped black areas. It is considered a panel.

Note that the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 displays, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of the left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 does not display the above-mentioned parallax barrier image ( By using a fully transparent display), a two-dimensional image (2D image) can also be displayed.

In other words, the autostereoscopic image display device 5', which is the display means of the present modification 006SG-7, is composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in addition to a monoscopic image (2D image) that is a non-stereoscopic image. It is possible to display autostereoscopic images.

Note that the stereoscopic image consisting of the right-eye image and the left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn in the above-mentioned layers like the monoscopic image (2D image), while the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel The parallax barrier image displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When displaying an effect image using such an autostereoscopic image display device 5', other effects may be stereoscopically displayed at a timing different from the specific effect (for example, development suggestion effect) in the present invention during variable display. It may also be possible to perform this by displaying a visual image (3D image).

As shown in FIG. 14-45 (A) to FIG. 14-45 (D), during variable display, the autostereoscopic image display device 5' displays an image that moves upward, which is a displacement specific image, as described above. It is possible to perform a development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance in which images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have been moved, and an image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward, can be executed, and the development suggestion performance has a different execution period. A variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is executed as a non-overlapping preview performance, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display preview performance.

In other words, a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward are displayed. In this case, only a monoscopic image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward are displayed in this way, the display is displayed in a non-stereoscopic manner. By using a two-dimensional image (2D image) as an image, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to a stereoscopic image, which reduces the interest of the performance. It can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the effects of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) and the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward Since the execution period of the image is different from the development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance that is displayed, the display of stereoscopic images (3D images) is restricted based on the execution period of the performance. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when displaying a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) during the same performance, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed while the displacement specific image is displayed. In order to prevent the displacement specific image from being displayed, data such as a display flag that can identify that a displacement specific image is being displayed is stored, and based on this data, a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed. The display may be restricted. In addition, regarding these restrictions, in order to prevent stereoscopic images (3D images) from being displayed immediately after or just before the display of the displacement specific image ends, there are certain restrictions before and after the period in which the displacement specific image is displayed. Also during the period, display of stereoscopic images (3D images) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag.

In addition, although the above-mentioned modification 006SG-7 exemplifies a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic image display device 5' using the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed using an autostereoscopic image display device using a lenticular lens method or an integral imaging method other than the parallax barrier method.

In addition, although this modified example 006SG0-7 exemplifies a form in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and stereoscopic vision is also displayed in the development suggestion performance. There may also be a case where an image (3D image) is displayed. In addition, when displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) in the exhibition presentation, the images (right eye image and left eye image) of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are drawn and the monoscopic image (2D image) is It is sufficient to draw and arrange the image in an image drawing area (for example, layer 1 image drawing area) higher than the image drawing area to be placed. By doing this, the stereoscopic image (3D image) will be displayed with priority over the monoscopic image (2D image), so the stereoscopic image (3D image) will be suitably displayed in the development suggestion performance. can do.

In addition, in this modification example 006SG-7, as a performance for displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image), a variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is different from the development suggestion performance (specific performance). Although the embodiment has been exemplified in a form that can be executed during the period, the present invention is not limited to this. A stereoscopic image (3D image) may also be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the development suggestion performance (specific performance) will be executed by displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), so the development suggestion performance (specific performance) The production effect can be further improved. Furthermore, there are multiple performance modes for the introductory performance and for the development suggestion performance (specific performance), and the practice mode for the development suggestion performance (specific performance) can be changed depending on which performance mode the introduction performance is performed in. It may be different.

Furthermore, in the introduction performance, the movable body 32 is operated, and the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are linked to produce the performance effects of the introduction performance and the development suggestion performance (specific performance). may be improved.

Further, in the feature section 006SG, an example is given in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 14-46 as a modification 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface in the feature section 006SG) (corresponding to image 006SG005J), a medal payout display, an AT (assist time) remaining game number display, a medal display stored as credits, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 along with the performance image, and these game-related information are displayed. It is sufficient to use an image that is not subject to displacement.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modification example, as a specific effect of the present invention, a form of effect that changes or distorts (distorts) the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified, but The present invention is not limited to this, and as the specific effect, the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed or distorted repeatedly.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modification example, the development suggestion performance, the reach suggestion performance, the revival performance, the advance notice performance, the promotion performance, the temporary stop suggestion performance, and the temporary stop notification performance are exemplified as specific performances in the present invention, A plurality of performances may be possible as these specific performances. In addition, in the case where a plurality of specific effects can be executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, it is possible to execute an effect in which decorative patterns (characters and numbers) are not separated, such as a development suggestion effect, in the normal state. On the other hand, a performance in which a decorative pattern (numbers only) is divided into a plurality of pieces or display areas may be performed, such as a revival performance or a look-ahead preview performance. By doing this, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of a specific performance due to the fact that the decorative patterns containing characters and numbers are not separated, and in the time-saving state, on the contrary, the decorative patterns containing only numbers can be prevented. By dividing, the performance effect of a specific performance can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state, and the decorative pattern is composed of only numbers in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed from the middle of the variable display in a specific variation pattern such as the variable display in the super reach variation pattern. For example, in the variable display of super reach, a decorative pattern consisting of characters and numbers is displayed variablely during the period from the start of the variable display until reach, and after reach, a decorative pattern consisting only of numbers is displayed. All you have to do is display the variable. Furthermore, in the period after the reach, as a specific performance in the present invention, a performance in which decorative symbols are divided, such as a resurrection performance, may be made possible.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 006SG and each modification example, an example is given in which an image in which at least a part of the specific image according to the present invention is displaced in the horizontal direction or vertical direction is displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a portion of the specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. That is, the image displacement direction in the present invention may include the enlargement/reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4, in the displacement target image, from the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image, according to the R value and G value of the pixel A, Although the form of generating a displacement image using a replacement method in which a pixel X is identified and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) to a position corresponding to a pixel A of a displacement image has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, in a displacement target image, a displacement image is created using a method (moving method) in which pixel X at a position corresponding to pixel A of the displacement image is moved to a position according to the R value and G value of the pixel A. May be generated. In addition, in the replacement method, as in Modified Example 006SG-3, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the area close to the boundary into a displacement image that takes into account the width of the boundary between areas with different moving directions. On the other hand, in the case of the replacement method, there is no need to perform these edits, so it is possible to reduce the video creation load, and when placing an effect image etc. at the boundary, it is necessary to set the boundary where the effect image is placed. Since the degree of freedom can be increased, the burden of creating video including effect images can be reduced.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
A display means having a display area capable of displaying an image, capable of displaying a display image of game-related information regarding the progress of the game in the display area, and capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
a storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image for displaying each image arranged in the plurality of display layers in the display area;
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a specific display effect that displays the specific display and a specific light emitting effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light can be executed, and a specific display effect that displays the specific image in the display area can be performed. and an executable production execution means,
The image processing means is capable of generating the specific image in a specific display layer,
The display image of the game-related information is generated on a special display layer that is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer,
The effect executing means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a manner according to the specific light emitting effect before the display of the specific display is completed, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition,
The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect indicating that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is not being executed. The specific light emitting effect can be executed by
Further comprising a sound output means capable of outputting a variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display, a suggestive performance compatible sound corresponding to the suggestive performance, and a specific light emitting performance compatible sound corresponding to the specific light emitting performance,
The sound output means includes:
When the specific light emitting effect is executed when the variable display compatible sound is output, the specific light emitting effect compatible sound can be output with priority over the variable display compatible sound that is being output,
When the specific light emitting effect is executed when the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the specific light emitting effect corresponding sound can be outputted with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output,
Before the light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and at a predetermined ending timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission,
If the light emission of the light emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the light emitting means of the light emitting means may emit light at a specific end timing subsequent to the predetermined end timing. A gaming machine that performs special termination control to terminate the game.

Images